- 2.22 MB
- 2021-10-12 发布
- 1、本文档由用户上传，淘文库整理发布，可阅读全部内容。
- 2、本文档内容版权归属内容提供方，所产生的收益全部归内容提供方所有。如果您对本文有版权争议，请立即联系网站客服。
- 3、本文档由用户上传，本站不保证质量和数量令人满意，可能有诸多瑕疵，付费之前，请仔细阅读内容确认后进行付费下载。
- 网站客服QQ：403074932
人教版新目标初中英语九年级上册
全册单元同步测试题及答案+九年级英语知识点总结大全
人教版新目标初中英语九年级上册单元同步测试题及答案
全 册 同步随堂测试 Unit 1 满分120分，限时100分钟
第二部分 英语知识运用
Ⅰ. 根据句意和汉语或首字母提示补全单词（每小题1分，共10分）
21. They hope the _______ ______ (友谊) between their countries will last long.
22. At last he _______ (认识到) that he made a lot of mistakes.
23. Chinese people should not be afraid of any _______ (挑战) outside.
24. —How long has your brother been a_______（军人）?
—For three years.
25. I really don’t know how to _______ (处理) with the problem?
26. I’m not good at English reading. I read very s______.
27. I didn’t understand Vera because she didn’t p ______ some words clearly.
28. Our English teacher asked us to read English a_______ in the morning .
29. My sister usually makes m_______ in grammar.
30. In England, there are three t______ in a school year.
第二部分 英语知识运用
Ⅱ.单项选择（每小题1分，共15分）
31. —How does he study _______ the English test?
—He studies it by making vocabulary list.
A. with B. to C. for D. from
32. Successful people do _______things, they do things_______.
A. different; differently B. differently; differently
C. different; different D. differently; different
33. _____ the words of pop songs also helps a little with English study.
A. Memorize B. Memorizes C. Memorized D. Memorizing
34. —My spoken English is poor. What shall I do?
—That’s easy. Practice _______ it as much as possible.
A. speak B. speaks C. speaking D. to speak
35. If you don’t know how to spell a new word, you should _______ in a dictionary.
A. look up it B. look up them C. look it up D. look them up
36. As time _______, we know each other better.
A. goes by B. passed by C. went off D. going by
37. —How do you learn Chinese ?
—I learn it ______ reading more papers and magazines.
A. by B. across C. from D. with
38. Our English teacher told us some ways of _______English.
A. learn B. to learn C. learning D. teaching
39. Though it is Sunday, I have many problems to _______ with.
A. deal B. answer C. solve D. solution
40. When I spoke English, people there always _______me.
A. laughed at B. got on with C. hated D. disliked
41. Remember not to speak _______ when we are in the reading room.
A. fast B. slowly C. politely D. loudly
42. —_______ do you study English?
—By listening to the tapes.
A. How B. Where C. When D. Why
43. You won’t pass your exams_______ you work harder.
A. when B. if C. unless D. after
44. —I’m sorry I’m late.
—_______. But don’t be late next time.
A. All right B. You’re welcome C. It doesn’t matter D. That’s right
45. We _______ our English teacher ______ our mother because she is very kind to us.
A. regard; of B. regard; as C. look; of D. watch; as
Ⅲ. 选词并用其适当形式填空（每小题1分，共5分）
speak, solve, learn , different , pronounce
46. We are learning English, so we are all English _______.
47. —Are you good at English?
—Yes, but my _______ is so poor. Can you help me?
48. It may take a long time to find a _______ to the problem.
49. How could she act _______ ?
50. Li Lei’s _______ English is very poor. We can hardly understand him.
Ⅳ. 根据汉语提示完成下列句子（每小题2分，共10分）
51. 你觉得制作抽认卡是学英语的最好的方法吗？
Do you think making flashcards is _______ _______ _______ _______ learn English?
52. 如果你不懂每一个句子，那也没有关系。
It _______ ______ if you _______ ______every sentence.
53. 我害怕说英语，因为同学们可能会嘲笑我。
I’m _______ ______ _______ English because my classmates may _______ ______ me.
54. 我通过与朋友练习对话提高我的英语口语。
I _______ my_______ English _______ _______ conversations with friends.
55. 学生在课堂上应该记笔记。
Students should _______ _______ in class.
Ⅴ.完形填空（每小题1分，共10分）
Do you know how to study better and make your study more effective（有效的）? We all know that Chinese students usually study very hard for long 56 . This is very good, but it doesn’t 57 a lot, for an effective student must have enough sleep, enough food and enough rest and exercise. Every day you need to go out for a walk or visit some friends or some nice places. It’s good for your study.
When you return 58 your studies, your mind will be refreshed（清醒） and you’ll learn more 59 study better. Psychologists 60 that learning takes place this way. Here take English learning 61 an example. First you make a lot of progress（进步） and you feel happy. Then your language study seems 62 the same. So you will think you’re learning 63 and you may give up. This can last for days or even weeks, yet you needn’t give up. At some point your language study will again take another big
64 . You’ll see that you really have been learning all along. If you get enough sleep, food, rest and exercise, studying English can be very effective and 65 . Don’t give up along the way. Learn slowly and you’re sure to get a good result.
56. A. days B. time C. house D. weeks
57. A. help B. give C. make D. take
58. A. after B. for C. at D. to
59. A. yet B. and C. or D. but
60. A. have found B. have taught C. told D. said
61. A. with B. for C. as D. to
62. A. to have B. to make C. to take D. to stay
63. A. something B. anything C. nothing D. everything
64. A. work B. jump C. walk D. result
65. A. hard B. common C. interesting D. possible
Ⅵ. 阅读理解（每小题2分，共20分）
A
Students often want to practice their English outside class. One of the best ways of practicing your English is to speak to foreigners. Most of the students ask, “Is it OK to talk to foreigners when we meet them in the street? ”
The answer is yes and no, but probably no! If you see a foreigner who looks lost, it is polite to ask him or her, “May I help you? ” But if not, you should probably let him or her get on with the business. That is, you can talk to a foreigner at some time or place. Feel free to ask him or her questions if a foreigner comes into your school, classroom or your teachers’ office.
It’s also OK to talk to foreigners in some public places. If you see a foreigner alone in a restaurant, a waiting room, or a shop, it may be the right time for you to ask him or her. “Is this seat free? ” or questions like this. You can probably help them if they are new to China. And if they are alone, you may be able to make them feel more welcome.
It’s a pleasure to talk to a foreigner if you choose the right time and place.
66. What is the best way to practice your English?
A. Speak to a teacher. B. Speak to your friends.
C. Speak to foreigners. D. Speak to your parents.
67. From the passage, we know that_______.
A. it is polite to stop foreigners to talk with you in the street
B. it is polite to stop foreigners to talk with you when they are busy
C. it isn’t polite to stop foreigners to talk with you when they are on business
D. it isn’t polite to help foreigners find their way
68. When you try to talk to a foreigner alone in a park, usually he may _______.
A. become angry B. keep quiet C. go away D. feel happy
69. This passage is mainly about _______.
A. language B. restaurant C. foreigners D. business
70. What would be the best title for the passage?
A. How to Learn English in Class
B. Why to Study English
C. When to Speak English with a Foreigner
D. How to Talk with a Foreigner
B
When you are learning English, you find it not clever to put an English sentence, word for word, into your own language. Take the sentence “How do you do?” as an example. If you look up each word in the dictionary, one at a time, what is your translation? It must be a wrong sentence in your own language.
Language do not just have different sounds, they are different in many ways. It’s important to master(掌握) the rules for word order in the study of English, too. If the sentences put words in a wrong order, the listeners can’t understand the speakers’ sentences easily. Sometimes when the order is changed, the meaning of the sentence doesn’t change. Let’s see the difference between the two pairs of sentences.
“She only likes apples.” “Only she likes apples.”
“I’ve seen the film already.” “I have already seen the film.”
When you are learning English, you must do your best to get the spirit(精神实际) of the language and use it as the English speakers do.
71. From the passage we know that _______ when we are learning English.
A. we shouldn’t put every word into our own language
B. we shouldn’t look up every word in the dictionary
C. we need to put every word into our own language
D. we must read word by word
72. The writer thinks it is _______ in learning English.
A. difficult to understand different sounds
B. possible to remember the word order
C. important to master the rules in different way
D. easy to master the rules for word order
73. We can learn from the passage that _______.
A. the meaning of an English sentence always changes with the order of the words
B. the order of words can never change the meaning of an English sentence
C. sometimes different order of words has a different meaning
D. if the order of words is different, the meaning of the sentence must be different
74. “She only likes apples,” _______.
A. is the same as “Only she likes apple”. B. is different from “Only she likes apple”.
C. means “She likes fruit except apples”. D. means “She doesn’t like apples”.
75. Which is the best title for this passage?
A. Different Orders, Different Meanings B. How to Speak English
C. How to Put English into Our Own Language D. How to Learn English
Ⅶ.补全对话（每小题2分，共10分）
从方框中选择句子完成对话，有两句为多余项。
A: Hello! This is Follow Me. Can I help you?
B: Yes. 76
A: What are your problems?
B: First, 77
A: Take it easy. Why not read aloud to practice it?
B: OK, I’ll try it. 78
A: Listening to more tapes will help improve your listening skills.
B: What about new words? I can’t remember them.
A. You should try to guess the meaning of them. 79
B: Thank you very much.
A: You’re welcome. 80
A. I hope your English will improve soon.
B. Also I can’t understand the teacher in class.
C. I have some problems with English.
D. Why don’t you join an English language club?
E. I can’t get the pronunciation right.
F. You can write the new words in your notebook and study them at home.
G. Then you can look them up in a dictionary if necessary.
Ⅷ. 任务型阅读（每小题2分，共10分）
In learning English, one should first pay attention to（注意） listening and speaking. It is groundwork of reading and writing. You’d better try your best to speak while you do much listening. Don’t be afraid of making mistakes. But be careful not to let them stop you from improving your English. While you are doing this, a good way is to write—keep a diary, write notes or letters, then if you can, ask some others to go through what you have written and tell you where it is wrong. Many mistakes in your speaking will be easily found when you write. Through correcting the mistakes, you can do better in learning English.
If you are slow in speaking, don’t worry. One of the helpful ways is reading, either aloud or to yourself. The important thing is to choose something interesting to read. It
mustn’t be too difficult for you. When you are reading in this way, don’t stop to look up the new words if you can guess their meanings when they have nothing important to do with the sentences. You can do that some other time.
根据短文内容，完成句子。
81. For the beginners, _______and _______is more important than reading and writing.
82. When you are speaking, you may _______ ______.
83. One of the good ways to find your mistakes in your speaking is to write ______or _______.
84. If you want to be fluent（流利的） when speaking, you should choose_______ ______to read to yourself.
85. When you are reading, you’d better _______ ______up the new words if you can guess their meaning.
Ⅸ. 书面表达（共10分）
假设你是Xu Zheng,你们的外籍老师Pierre在学校网站设立了“有问必答”栏目，假如你在学习英语的过程中，遇到以下困难：
1. 听不懂老师讲课；
2. 犯语法错误；
3. 记不住单词；
4. 发音不准。
请用英语把自己遇到的困难写出来，发到Pierre的博客上。请他帮助解决。
要求：1. 句子通顺，条理清晰，词汇运用恰当。
2. 时态语态运用合理，没有语法错误。
3. 词数：80词左右。
Mr. Pierre，
These days I feel English is difficult for me because I have some problems in learning English.
Yours
Xu Zheng
Unit2同步测试
第二部分 英语知识运用
Ⅰ. 根据句意和汉语或首字母提示补全单词（每小题1分，共10分）
21. The old woman is afraid of flying in an_______ (飞机).
22. —What _______(造成) the traffic accident?
—The bad weather.
23. Tell me_______(确切地) where he lives so that I can find him.
24. In the end, they made a difficult _______ (决定) to send their son to a boys’ boarding school.
25. My young brother likes reading _______ (连环漫画) very much.
26. —Tom, you should pay a_______ to your spelling.
—Sorry, I will.
27. Mary used to c______ gum a lot in class, but now she doesn’t do again.
28. These days I hardly have time to c______ with my friends on the Internet.
29. Our English teacher was very p_______ and helpful.
30. You eat too much c_______. It’s bad for your teeth.
Ⅱ. 单项选择（每小题1分，共15分）
31. He_______ suffer the Internet after school, but now he doesn’t like it.
A. use to B. using to C. used to D. uses to
32. Mary is afraid to go out at night because she is ______ the dark.
A. terrified of B. interested in C. worried about D. angry with
33. Many girls are terrified of _______ alone at night, but my sister isn’t.
A. walk B. walking C. walked D. to walk
34. —I don’t know how to study English well.
—I think you should _______ your spelling.
A. pay attention to B. listen to C. worry about D. pay for
35. _______we are clever, we still need to work hard.
A. If B. Unless C. Even though D. Since
36. Her mother couldn’t _______to pay for her children’s education because her family is very poor.
A. want B. afford C. try D. offer
37. My brother likes to sleep ______ the light _______.
A. on; on C. with; on C. with; turn on D. with; in
38. —Do you have any trouble ______ the teachers in class, Jim?
—Yes, especially in Chinese class.
A. to understand B. understand C. understanding D. understood
39. When he was young, he was ______ in science.
A. interesting B. interested C. interests D. interest
40. Mario used to ______ after school.
A. practice playing the piano B. practicing playing the piano
C. practice play the piano D. to practice playing the piano
41. I used to spend two hours ______ my homework, but now only one hour.
A. doing B. do C. to do D. did
42. Please don’t give up ______ and you’ll succeed in the end.
A. try B. trying C. to try D. tries
43. —Did they solve all the problems______?
—Yes, they did.
A. at the end B. at the end of C. in the end D. by the end of
44. It _______ that Tony has changed a lot.
A. look like B. seems C. look D. seemed
45. —_______ work in a car factory?
—No. I used to work in a computer company.
A. Did you used to B. Did you use to C. Do you used to D. Do you use to
Ⅲ. 选词并用其适当形式填空（每小题1分，共5分）
terrify, he, decide, surprised, die
46. When Martin was a child, he caused problems for _______ and his family.
47. The girl is ______ of the dark, so she doesn’t go out in the evening.
48. His father’s ______ made him very sad.
49. To our ______, he didn’t die and came back again.
50. You have to make a quick _______ before it rains.
Ⅳ. 句型转换(每小题2分，共10分)
51. I used to watch TV in the evenings. (改为否定句)
I ______ _____ to watch TV in the evenings.
52. Jeff used to be shy. (改为反意疑问句)
Jeff used to be shy, _______ ______?
53. We walked to school before. But now we don’t. (合并为一句)
We _______ ______ _______ to school.
54. My mother used to work in a supermarket.（就划线部分提问）
_______ did your mother use _______ ______?
55. I used to spend two hours chatting online. (就划线部分提问)
_______ ____ ______ you use to spend chatting online?
Ⅴ. 根据汉语提示完成下列句子（每小题2分，共10分）
56. 我以前非常惧怕黑暗。
I used to _______ _______ _______ the dark.
57. 我的弟弟经常开着卧室的灯睡觉。
My brother often _______ ______ _______ with the bedroom light on.
58. 令我吃惊的是他在比赛中获得了第一名。
_______ _______ ______, he won the first in the game.
59. 你已经戒烟了吗? 它对你的健康有害。
Have you _______ ______ smoking? It’s bad for your health.
60. 她对自己三个孩子的成就感到自豪。
She ______ great ______ _______the success of her three children.
Ⅵ. 完形填空（每小题1分，共10分）
As I remember, when I was a child, summers were always a great time for me. In summer I used to be free from school, I didn’t have anything 61 to do, and I used to be on holiday in a quiet place with my friends.
We usually 62 a small country house to rest for weeks, and I could do what I liked most of the time.
Once four of my friends and I went on a trip.We started early in the morning and 63 the village by the main road. We wanted to get to another small village. The sun was too hot and the road 64 too long. One of my friends said that he knew a shorter way through the forest. We all agree to 65 the distance and go through the unknown（不出名的）forest.
We had a 66 walk there. We walked in the shade(阴凉处), and we heard the bird singing and we saw small animals in the forest. We 67 over a group of bushes(灌木丛), and found an old forest house. The wooden walls had fallen down, there wasn’t a roof, and all kinds of old things were lying 68 in the weeds(杂草). They were here and there. The place was abandoned(遗弃) and so lonely that we wanted to 69 there very fast but we actually felt happy.
We 70 got out of the woods, and we were lucky to get to the small village. I will never forget childhood memories like this.
61. A. interesting B. frustrated C. complete D. special
62. A. cared about B. stayed at C. waited for D. deal with
63. A. memorized B. reached C. left D. regarded
64. A. seemed B. kept C. caused D. made
65. A. waste B. cut C. afford D. take
66. A. wonderful B. terrified C. patient D. boring
67. A. climbed B. worked C. decided D. crossed
68. A. on B. down C. around D. by
69. A. get away from B. give up C. break off D. take to
70. A. easily B. quickly C. exactly D. hardly
Ⅶ. 阅读理解（每小题2分，共20分）
A
The other day my daughter brought home her math homework. “I have to subtract (减) 179 from 202,” she said.
“It’s quite easy,” I said. “You put the 202 over the 179.”
“But we need a 10 here. Where is the 10?”
“I don’t know where the 10 is. Let’s just subtract 179 from 202. Nine from two is three. You carry one and add it to seven. Eight from zero is two. The answer is 23.”
“We can’t do it that way. We have to use the 10.”
“Well, I’m going to call your teacher to see how she subtracts 179 from 202.”
Over the telephone, I said that I was having a bit of trouble with the homework she had given to my daughter. The teacher said, “In the right-hand column (栏) we have units of one. The two in that column counts for two ones.The zero in the center counts for zero tens.The two in the left-hand
column counts for hundreds. Are you clear?” But I didn’t think I was clear.
I hung up and found my way to the medicine box. My head was now hurting. I started putting pills of medicine into my mouth. “How many did you take?” my wife asked. “I took one and then I took another…I know one and one was two, but don’t ask me what it is now.”
71. The daughter wanted ______ the other day.
A. to give her father a lesson
B. to show how difficult math was
C. her father to phone her teacher
D. her father to help her with her homework
72. Which of the following sentences is NOT true?
A. The father had a different way to do the math problem.
B. The father couldn’t do his daughter’s homework.
C. The daughter couldn’t understand her father’s way.
D. The daughter had some trouble doing the math problem.
73. From what the teacher said, we know that the underlined word “units” in Paragraph 7 means ______ here.
A. whole numbers less than 10 B. whole things
C. groups of lessons D. the smallest numbers
74. What the teacher said made the father _______.
A. angry B. worried C. sad D. tired
75. Can you guess what would happen next in the story?
A. The father would go to school and begin to learn math.
B. The father would become very ill and have to take more medicine.
C. The father would never do his daughter’s math problems again.
D. The father would go to the school and fight with the teacher.
B
I used to travel by air a great deal when I was a boy. My parents used to live in South America and I used to fly there from Europe on holidays. An air-hostess would take charge of me and I never had an unpleasant experience. I am used to traveling (习惯于某事) by air and only on one occasion have I ever felt frightened. After taking off, we were flying low over the city and slowly gaining height（逐步升高）, when the plane suddenly turned round and flew back to the airport. While we were waiting to land, an air-hostess told us to keep calm and to get off the plane quietly as soon as it had touched down. Everybody on board was worried and we were curious to find out what had happened. Later we learned that there was a very important person on board. The police had been told（被告诉，得知） that a bomb had been planted on the plane. After we had landed, the plane was searched thoroughly（被彻底搜查）. Fortunately, nothing was found and five hours later we were able to take off again.
根据短文内容，判断正（T）误（F）。
76. The writer used to fly much when he was a boy.
77. The writer’s parents used to live in South Africa.
78. While they were waiting to land, an air-hostess told them not to be calm.
79. Nothing was found and nine hours later they could take off again.
80. There was really a bomb on the plane.
Ⅷ. 任务型阅读（每小题2分，共10分）
E
Don’t fight with your classmates. Every one in the class needs help and friendship. Remember your classmates are the best ones to help you in school.
81
In school, don’t feel something difficult or boring. You should join in all kinds of activities. You should be interested in all subjects.
82
Don’t make any excuse if you do not do today’s work and leave it tomorrow. If the class is held up(耽误), it’s difficult to catch up with others.
83
Eating good meals is important, or you will think about food in class. Go to bed on time and keep having enough sleep. Do more sports to keep your body strong.
84
If you get bad marks in your tests, you can feel unhappy. It doesn’t matter, in fact. A person can’t be always successful. Sometimes he also has unpleasant things.
85
You should not play computers too much on weekends. You should go out for a walk and do your homework every day.
阅读短文内容，依照示例E将A－F分别填入文中空缺处，使标题与内容相匹配。
A. Do Today’s Work Today
B. Keep Active
C. Keep Healthy
D. Plan Your Time
E. Protect Your Friendship
F. Be Positive about School
Ⅸ. 书面表达（共10分)
假设你是Lin Tao，根据表格中提供的信息写一篇e-mail向你的笔友Kitty 介绍你的两位好朋友现在与过去发生的变化。开头已经给出，要求：80词左右。
in the past
now
David
Short
outgoing
play basketball
tall
generous
play football
Yu Mei
black straight hair
glasses
blonde curly hair
contact lenses(隐形眼镜)
Dear Kitty,
I have two friends, one is David, the other is Yu Mei.
Lin Tao
同步随堂测试 Unit 3
满分120分，限时100分钟，得分_______
第二部分 英语知识运用
Ⅰ. 根据句意和汉语或首字母提示补全单词（每小题1分，共10分）
21. The girl got her ears pierced and bought a new pair of _______ (耳环).
22. You can take his car. He just got his driver’s _______ (执照).
23. Many _______ (志愿者) will come to the old house this Friday.
24. Don’t make friends with that_______ （愚蠢的）boy.
25. We should work hard to _______ (实现) our dream.
26. I had asked him about it many times, but he didn’t r______.
27. My mother is busy at p_______ and can’t speak to you now.
28. Mr Brown has taught for many years so he has much e_______ in teaching.
29. I’m glad that I’ve s_______ in passing the English exam.
30. We call the kids who are between 13 years old and 19 years old t_______.
Ⅱ. 单项选择（每小题1分，共15分）
31. Teenagers shouldn’t ______ to go to an Internet bar.
A. be allowed B. be allow C. allow D. are allowed
32. _____ middle school students allowed to use mobile phone at school?
A. Do B. Did C. Are D. Can
33. Many students will be ______ if the class is boring.
A. sleep B. sleepy C. asleep D. slept
34. I have to stay at home ______ school nights.
A. in B. at C. on D. for
35. If you can’t get to sleep, then get up and try to do something _______ lying in bed.
A. and B. or C. instead of D. because of
36. —I went to the farm to help plant trees yesterday.
—_______.
A. So do I B. So was I C. I did so D. So did I
37. The teacher was very strict _______ his students.
A. in B. to C. with D. of
38. —By the way, when did you get your hair ______?
—Last week.
A. to cut B. cut C. cutting D. to be cut
39. I’m sorry, but I have to get home ______ 10:00 p. m.
A. by B. on C. after D. until
40. —I think teenagers shouldn’t be allowed to smoke.
—I agree ______ you.
A. with B. on C. about D. to
41. —Who do you think is right?
—It seems _______ he is right.
A. if B. that C. what D. who
42. I don’t think teenagers should be allowed to drive, because they are _____.
A. not enough serious B. not serious enough C. too serious D. to serious
43. —He said something bad about you.
—It doesn’t matter. I don’t _______ what he said.
A. take care of B. look after C. care about D. think about
44. —I’m sorry to hear that Bill failed the exam again.
—Don’t worry about him. I’m sure that he will never give up until he _____.
A. succeed B. succeeds C. success D. successful
45. The flowers _______ every day, or they’ll die.
A. must water B. must be watered C. should water D. can be watered
Ⅲ. 选词并用其适当形式填空（每小题1分，共5分）
opportunity, pierce, succeed, sleep, important
46. May I go to bed now? I’m so _______.
47. Most of us know the ______ of time.
48. Our parents don’t allow us to play with teenagers who get their ears_______.
49. Bill Gates is a ______man. His computer company made him the richest in the world.
50. His father is sorry to have lost two _______ to study in English because of his illness.
Ⅳ. 句型转换(每小题2分，共10分)
51. Sixteen-year- olds should be allowed to surf the Internet. （改为一般疑问句）
______sixteen-year-olds _______ allowed to surf the Internet?
52. Rubbish can be thrown into the river. （改为否定句）
Rubbish _______ _____ ______ into the river.
53. You must finish this work before 5 o’clock tomorrow. （改为被动语态）
This work _____ ______ ______ before 5 o’clock tomorrow.
54. Teenagers should be allowed to choose their own clothes.(对划线部分提问)
_______ ______ teenagers be allowed to _______?
55. English can be spoken by a lot of people in China now. （改为主动语态）
A lot of people in China _______ ______English now.
Ⅴ. 根据汉语提示完成下列句子（每小题2分，共10分）
56. 我太累了，我想呆在家而不是出去踢足球。
I’m too tired. I’d love to stay at home _______ ______ ______soccer outside.
57. 不要熬夜，那对你的健康有害。
Don’t _______ ______. It’s bad for your health.
58. 如果你想把英语说得更好，就应该尽可能多练习。
If you want to speak English better, you should practice______ ______ ______ _______.
59. 他不会让感情妨碍自己的工作的。
He wouldn’t allow the emotion to _______ _____ _____ ______ _______his job.
60. 学生们应当多关注他们的学习而不是他们的衣服。
The students should ______ _______ ______ their studies rather than their clothes.
Ⅵ. 完形填空（每小题1分，共10分）
Children use their parents as models, whether the model is good or bad. My neighbors are very good 61 .
Mrs Roodhouse is a careful housekeeper. 62 she went to work yesterday, her children cleaned the rooms. The eldest daughter took all the carpets 63 and shook them. The middle daughter did all the dishes, and the youngest daughter put the toys 64 good order. The only boy in the family cleaned the furniture. When the children 65 their work, they put beautiful flowers on the table for their mother.
Mrs Frowzier is a terrible housekeeper. When she went to work, her children made a big mess. One of 66 drank some coke and threw the bottle. The glass wasn’t swept up, and the carpet was made 67 . The rubbish in the kitchen grew 68 because the children ate bananas and oranges and threw the peels on the floor. One child drew pictures on the wall and rode his bike in the rooms. Both mothers 69 home, but 70 of them was glad of that.
61. A. facts B. stories C. examples D. friends
62. A. Before B. Until C. Since D. When
63. A. outside B. inside C. upstairs D. downstairs
64. A. at B. in C. for D. with
65. A. began B. finished C. prepared D. wanted
66. A. us B. them C. you D. him
67. A. clean B. dry C. dirty D. neat
68. A. smaller B. more useful C. lighter D. larger
69. A. came B. come C. comes D. were coming
70. A. neither B. both C. only one D. all
Ⅶ. 阅读理解（每小题2分，共20分）
A
Dear students,
The following rules are for life and work in Belleyboys School. Please read them carefully.
1. Stand up when a teacher or a visitor goes into the room.
2. You must be in a classroom or other study places during lesson time.
3. Arrive in time for the start of each lesson with the things you need so that you are ready to start work.
4. Wear smart, clean clothing. Hair must be clean and tidy; extreme colors and styles are not allowed. Long hair must be tied back neatly.
5. Do not leave school if you are not allowed.
6. Food and drink must not be taken out from the dining room.
7. All medicines must be given by the school doctor.
8. Radios and personal computers may only be used in dormitory houses where the house rules allow. They are not allowed in classes or in the library.
Belleyboys School
根据短文内容，判断正（T）误（F）。
71. You must be only in a classroom during lesson time.
72. Long hair must be tied back neatly.
73. Personal computers can be used in the library.
74. You can leave school anytime if you want.
75. Food and drink can be taken out from the dining room.
B
New rules and behavior standards (行为规范) for middle school students came out in March. Middle School is going to use a new way to decide who the top students are. The best students won’t only have high marks. They will also be kids who don’t dye(染) their hair, smoke or drink. The following are some of the new rules.
Tell the truth. Have you ever copied someone else’s work on a test? Don’t do it again! That’s not something an honest(诚实的) student should do. If you have played computer games for two hours in your room, don’t tell your parents you have done homework.
Do more at school. Good students love animals and care for other people. April is Bird-loving Month in China. Is your school doing anything to celebrate? You should join! That way, you can learn more about animals and how to protect them. When more people work together, it makes it more fun for everyone.
Have you ever quarreled with your teammates? When your basketball team lost, only working together can make your team stronger. Be friendly to the people you are with. Try to think of others, not only yourself.
Be open to new ideas. Have you ever thought that people could live on the moon? Maybe you’ll discover（发现） Earth II someday. Don’t look down on new ideas. Everyone’s ideas are important. You should welcome them, because new ideas make life better for everyone.
Protect yourself. Has someone ever taken money from one of your classmates? Don’t let it happen to you. If you have to go home late, you should let your parents know.
Use the Internet carefully. The Internet can be very useful for your studies. But some things on the Internet aren’t for kids, so try to look at web pages that are good for you. You can use the web for fun or homework. Can’t you find any good Web sites for children? Here is one:
http://www.cycnet.com
76. The school new rules will help kids by telling them _______.
A. they can study well B. what they should do at school
C. how they can protect themselves D. what is right and what is wrong
77. According to the passage, which of the following is NOT true?
A. Take care of yourself when you are out.
B. Tell the truth, even when you are wrong.
C. Keep some animals to protect them.
D. Use the Internet, but keep away from bad things.
78. The main idea of the fourth paragraph is about _______.
A. making the team stronger B. working together with others
C. being a good friend to others D. getting on well with others
79. Good web sites for children can _______.
A. be a waste of time B. help them with their studies
C. do homework for them D. make life easier
80. The passage tells us how to _______.
A. be top students B. do more at school C. care for others D. use the Internet
Ⅷ. 任务型阅读（每小题2分，共10分）
Should Students Wear School Uniforms?
As we know, wearing school uniforms is indispensable for Japanese students, whereas for American students, it is not such a case, so should Chinese students wear school uniforms?
Some believe in the advantages of wearing school uniforms. Firstly, uniforms can cultivate collective spirit, which is typical of Japanese students. Secondly, schools can be kept in good order with uniforms since the outsiders will be recognized immediately. Beside, wearing school uniforms can help students develop simple life habits. However, others don’t think so. They claim that wearing school uniforms will deprive students of individuality, which is always the source of amazing creativity. As for collective spirit, attending sports games seems to be more effective, and wearing school uniforms doesn’t result in simple life habit as we expect.
根据文章，写出赞成与不赞成穿校服的理由。
Pro
Con
Uniforms can cultivate collective spirit.
81. _______________________
82. _______________________
83. _______________________
84. _______________________
85. _______________________
Ⅸ. 书面表达（共10分）
学生应当遵守学校的规章制度。请根据表格内容，用短文表述表格中的五点内容，并提出你认为中学生应该遵守的学校规章制度；选择其中一点或几点谈谈你的看法。
要求：1.词数：80左右（不包括文中已给出的第一句）；
2.条理清楚，语义连贯，句式规范，字迹工整。
School Rules
School uniform
In class
Homework
In the library
Classmates
School Rules
Every school has its own rules for students.
同步随堂测试 Unit 4
满分120分，限时100分钟，得分_______
第二部分 英语知识运用
Ⅰ. 根据句意和汉语或首字母提示补全单词（每小题1分，共10分）
21. My grandmother fell _______ (在楼下) and hurt her knees yesterday.
22. If I were you, I’d _______ (介绍) myself first .
23. The river is one and a half meters _______ (深).
24. This problem is _______(相当地) easy to work out.
25. Let’s forget about those _______ (烦恼) and enjoy ourselves.
26. —Excuse me, May I have some fruit, please?
—Sorry, there are no fruit to o_______ at the party.
27. The doctor will do medical r_______ on animals such as dogs and white mice.
28. What would you do if you have a hundred m_______ dollars.
29. No one is allowed to enter the room without p_______.
30. Eating p_______ of vegetables is good for our health.
Ⅱ. 单项选择（每小题1分，共15分）
31. —I always feel nervous before the exams. What should I do?
—If I were you, I _______ take a long walk before going to bed.
A. will B. could C. would D. was
32. There is ______ rain in Guangzhou at this time of year.
A. many B. few C. plenty of D. a lot
33. —So many difficulties.
—Yes, if Li Ping ______ here, that would be good.
A. was B. is C. were D. has been
34. The little girl often gets ______ when she meets strangers.
A. nervous B. sad C. terrible D. careful
35. ______ people all over the world came to Beijing for the 2008 Olympic Games this year.
A. Million B. Millions C. Millions of D. Million of
36. This morning he got up late and went to school without ______ breakfast.
A. have B. has C. having D. to have
37. He is easy to ______, so he has ______ friends.
A. get along well with; plenty of B. get on well; lots of
C. get along; plenty of D. get along well; many
38. I don’t have a present, ______ everyone else brings a present?
A. How if B. What for C. What D. What if
39. When will the new book ______ has not been decided yet.
A. come on B. come out C. come over D. come up with
40. The sad news let the whole people ______, they had to think of another way to solve the problem.
A. up B. down C. off D. on
41. Some people said they would rather ______ a new car rather than ______it.
A. buy; to repair B. to buy; to repair C. buy; repair D. to buy; repair
42. I don’t like this kind of shirt ______ the slightest.
A. in B. on C. of D. at
43. He is a(n)______ man. He never feels tired.
A. creative B. energetic C. friendly D. shy
44. —What would you give your mother for her birthday if you had enough money?
—I’m not sure. But I’d give her______.
A. something special B. anything special
C. special something D. nothing special
45. You’ll win the game, I am very ______ of you.
A. believe B. sure C. confidence D. confident
Ⅲ. 选词并用其适当形式填空（每小题1分，共5分）
be, worry, slight, she, million, listen, knowledge, shelf, help, medicine
46. There are _______ of birds in the forest.
47. Anna is very shy and she doesn’t like to talk in public. She is a good _______.
48. Please put these books on those _______.
49. He gave us several _______ suggestions.
50. —Who does your grandmother live with?
—Nobody. She lives by _______.
51. My uncle is interested in Chinese medicine and he’s reading lots of Chinese ______ books.
52. Dr. Ben is a_______ man. There’s nothing he never knows.
53. Why do you look so_______. What happened?
54. If you are confident, you shouldn’t worry about social situations in the _______.
55. If I _______ you, I’d go to watch the World Cup.
Ⅳ. 根据汉语提示完成下列句子（每小题2分，共10分）
56. 尽管他很小，他和他的老师相处得很好。
Though he is very young, he is ______ ______ ______ ______ his teachers.
57. 他想出了增加销售的新主意。
He ______ _____ ______ a new idea for increasing sales.
58. 她宁愿买些书也不愿买零食。
She______ ______ _______ some books _______ some snacks.
59. 我们不想让我们的父母失望。
We don’t want to _______ our parents _______.
60. 他新创作的小说什么时候出版?
When will his new novel______ _______?
Ⅴ. 完形填空（每小题1分，共10分）
There was a woman in Detroit, who had two sons. She was worried about them, especially the younger one, Ben, 61 he was not doing well in school. Boys in his class made jokes about him because he seemed so 62 .
The mother 63 that she would, herself, have to get her sons to do better in school. She told them to go to the Detroit Public Library to read a 64 for a week and write a report about it to her.
One day, in Ben’s 65 , the teacher held up a rock and asked if anyone knew it. Ben put up has hand and the teacher let him 66 . “Why did Ben raise his hand?” they wondered. He
67 said anything; what could he possibly want to say?
Well, Ben not only 68 the rock; he said a lot about it. He named other rocks in its group and even knew 69 the teacher had found it.The teacher and the students were 70 . Ben had learned all this from doing one of his book 71 .
Ben later went on to the 72 of his class. When he finished high school, he went to Yale University and at last became one of the best doctors in the United States.
After Ben had grown up, he 73 something about his mother that he did not know as a
74 .
She, herself, had never learned how to 75 .
61. A. because B. so C. but D. though
62. A. clever B. hard C. slow D. quick
63. A. asked B. decided C. forgot D. heard
64. A. notice B. message C. book D. question
65. A. class B. room C. office D. lab
66. A. think B. leave C. stand D. speak
67. A. always B. even C. quickly D. never
68. A. found B. played C. knew D. threw
69. A. whether B. when C. where D. why
70. A. afraid B. surprised C. worried D. unhappy
71. A. picture B. exercises C. shops D. reports
72. A. top B. end C. back D. behind
73. A. learnt B. remembered C. understood D. guessed
74. A. doctor B. child C. student D. teacher
75. A. read B. work C. teach D. slow
Ⅵ. 阅读理解（每小题2分，共20分）
A
According to a new Ministry of Education survey, student safety has become a big problem. Nearly half of students say they are worried about robbery(抢劫) on the way to and from school. Now in many big cities in China, some schools have taught an unusual lesson: self-protection(自我保护). Students like this lesson as there is no exams or boring classes. And they can learn how to save lines and know how to stop danger before it really happens.
Chen Haoyu, a teacher at Beijing No. 25 Middle School and a self-protection expert(专家), gives young students advice on how to deal with danger.
If you are robbed(抢劫), keep calm. If you can’t cry for help or run away, give the robber your money. Try to remember what the robber looks like and tell the police.
If your are in a traffic accident and a car hurts you, you should take down the car number. If it is a bicycle, try to contact your parents before you let the rider go. This is
because you don’t know how seriously you are hurt.
If is raining hard and there is lightning (闪电). Don’t stay in high places and keep away from trees.
When there is a fire, get away as fast as you can. Put wet things on your body and try and find an exit (出口). Do not take the lift!
If someone is drowning(溺水) but you can’t swim, don’t get into the water. Cry out for help.
Remember that danger is never as far away as you think. Take care of yourself at all times!
76. Why do students like the self-protection lesson?
A. Because there is advice on exams.
B. Because they can learn how to protect themselves.
C. Because they like self-protection experts.
D. Because they are free to do anything during the lesson.
77. The underlined (划线的) word “contact” means_______.
A. end up B. wait for C. search for C. get in touch with
78. If your house is on fire, you must _______.
A. put dry things on your body
B. run quickly and take the lift
C. run away and find an exit as quickly as you can
D. take everything you have and then run away
79. If you see a child fall into the river, but you can’t swim, you_______.
A. should cry out for help B. can jump into the river and save him
C. can do nothing D. telephone the doctor
80. What’s the best title for this passage?
A. Self-protection B. How to Take Care of Yourself
C. The Popular Lesson D. An Interesting Lesson
B
What would you do if you were not confident?
Confidence is the feeling that you are sure you can complete a difficult or even dangerous task. Feeling confident means that you are sure of your skills and abilities to succeed in a task. Why aren’t people more confident? How do you get self-confidence? Why not be more confident?
The reasons why people aren’t confident might be as follows:
They don’t acknowledge (承认) their successes. They look at a task or a goal as too large a task. Some people take on tasks that are too difficult.
How can you gain confidence? One way to gain confidence is to accept（接受） your successes and learn from your mistakes to enhance(增强) your confidence.
1. Break a task into smaller steps.
Before you set out to perform(完成) a task or try to achieve a goal, you must realize that the activity is really a series of (一系列) smaller steps. So, instead of waiting until the end to find out it you are successful, you can make several small successes leading up to the finish.
2. Acknowledge success for each step.
For each one of these steps or mini-tasks(小的任务), you must acknowledge your success. Congratulate yourself each time you succeed. If you don’t do well, correct the mistakes you made.
3. Enhance overall(全面的，总体的) confidence.
The self-talk will enhance your acknowledgement of your abilities and increase your confidence as you work towards achieving the greater goal.
In short, you can build your confidence by acknowledging your successes for each step along the way of trying to achieve a goal. The self-congratulations will build and enhance your confidence along the way to feeling like a champion.
81. This article mainly talks about _______.
A. how to learn from mistakes B. how to complete tasks
C. how to gain confidence D. how to acknowledge successes
82. Which of the following is not the reason why people aren’t confident?
A. They look at a task or a goal as too large a task.
B. They are sure of their skills and abilities to succeed in tasks.
C. They don’t acknowledge their successes.
D. They think that the tasks are too hard.
83. How can you gain confidence? This article mentions______ideas.
A. one B. two C. three D. four
84. Before you begin to perform a task or try to achieve a goal, you must______.
A. correct the mistakes you made B. build your self-confidence
C. enhance overall confident D. break a task into smaller steps
85. From this article we know that _______.
A. enhancing overall confidence can help us build our confidence
B. it’s not good to acknowledge our success
C. the self-congratulations is not helpful to build our confidence
D. we can’t make mistakes in performing a task or achieving a goal
Ⅶ. 任务型阅读（每小题2分，共10分）
请阅读下面材料，根据题中所描述的救护方法，在七幅图中找出与题意相对应的图画。
( )86. If the person has stopped breathing, you must try to start his/her breathing at once. The best thing is to use the mouth-to-mouth way. Lay the person on his/her back and breath into his/her mouth.
( )87. If the person is bleeding badly, you must try to stop the bleeding. Press on the bleeding point with a piece of clean cloth and hold up the part of the body which is bleeding.
( )88. If you are bitten(cut by teeth) by an animal, wash the cut under cold running water. Cover the broken part, if there is any, with a piece of clean cloth. Then see a doctor as soon as possible.
( )89. If you are burnt(hurt by fire or something very hot), cool the burnt part at once. Run cool (not cold) water over the burn until it is less painful. Put a piece of dry clean cloth over the burnt part.
( )90. If there is a fire, never use a lift in the building, because it’s very dangerous. The lift may get trapped between floors. Use the stairs and leave the building at once.
Ⅷ. 书面表达（共10分）
阅读下面的e-mail，假设你是Dr All-known，请根据Li Ming的e-mail所给信息提示和要求给他回信。
信息提示：1.保持心情愉快，别轻易发怒；2.乐于助人；3.学会与人合作.
要求：1. 在以上信息的基础上，至少提供2条建议；2. 不要逐字逐句翻译，适当发挥；
3. 80词左右。
发件人：liming @163.com
收件人：drall-known@yahoo.com 发送时间：8：00 a.m April 23rd , 2008
Dr All-known,
I’m so sad. This morning I argued with one of my best classmates again. But in fact, I really want to get on well with them. I don’t know how to do it. Could you help me?
With best wishes.
Yours
Li Ming
发件人：drall-known@yahoo.com
收件人：liming @163.com 发送时间：9：00 a.m April 24rd , 2008
Dear Li Ming,
I’m glad to hear from you.
I think some of us have the same trouble as you. Perhaps you may do like this:
I hope what I said can help you.
Best wishes.
Yours
Dr All-known
同步随堂测试 Unit 5
满分120分，限时100分钟，得分_______
第二部分 英语知识运用
Ⅰ. 根据句意和汉语或首字母提示补全单词（每小题1分，共10分）
21. Lu Xun is my favorite _______(作家).
22. My family are getting along well with our _______ (邻居).
23. Mother often feel _______(焦虑的) about their children when they don’t come back home on time.
24. —What does Mr. Li do in your school?
—He is the _______ (主任) of our school.
25. I can’t go to the movies with you because I have an _______(约会) with my friend.
26. That big house b_______ to Tom, not to his brother.
27. We are going to have a p_______ tomorrow. What food and drink should we take?
28. He burnt his f_____ when he smoked.
29. We got up late, I don’t know if we can c_______ the early train.
30. It’s sunny today. There are no clouds in the s_______.
Ⅱ. 单项选择（每小题1分，共15分）
31. —Whose bike is this?
—It must _______ Tony. His backpack is on it.
A. be B. belong C. belong to D. belongs to
32. This book _____ Lucy’s. Look! Her name is on the book cover.
A. must be B. may be C. can’t be D. might be
33. —Are you feeling better now?
—Don’t _______ my health. I’m very well now.
A. be worried B. worry
C. be worried about D. to worry about
34. —Where’s Jim?
—He might be _______ at home now.
A. sleep B. sleeping C. to sleep D. to sleeping
35. When Father came in, my little brother was pretending _______.
A. read B. to be reading C. to read D. reading
36. We don’t have any money. We have _______ and can not go back home.
A. used up it B. used them up C. used it up D. used up
37. I think another kind of pollution is _______ _．
A. noise B. voice C. sound D. word
38. The oral test _______20% of the final English exam.
A. makes up B. uses up C. looks up D. turns up
39. There are some kids _______ basketball on the playground.
A. play B. to play C. playing D. played
40. I saw many apples _______ from the tree to the ground.
A. is dropping B. to drop C. dropped D. dropping
41. —Did you _____ any strange noises outside the classroom?
—No, I didn’t.
A. listen B. hear C. listen to D. hear to
42. I don’t like winter because there’s _______ snow and ice.
A. much too B. too much C. too D. very
43.There must be _______in this little village.
A. something strange B. anything strange
C. strange something D. strange anything
44. —Where’s my notebook? I can’t find it.
—It ____ in your bag or under these books.
A. might be B. must be C. mustn’t be D. can’t be
45. —Tom, where is your father?
—I’m not sure. He_______ in his office.
A. is B. may be C. maybe D. may
Ⅲ. 选词并用其适当形式填空（每小题1分，共5分）
worry, finally, noise, interviewer, own
46. The reporter in TV station is going to _______our school principal tomorrow.
47. —Whose backpack is this?
—I think Bob is the _______.
48. You look so _______. What’s the matter?
49. Don’t worry. This is not the ______ result.
50. Would you please turn down your radio? That’s too_______.
Ⅳ. 句型转换（每小题2分，共10分）
51. He was worried because of her poor English. (对划线部分提问)
_______ ______ he worried?
52. Whose scarf is this? (改为同义句)
Who _______ the scarf_______ _____?
53. He might get to school late. (改为同义句)
He might _______ ______ _______ school.
54. He might be running to keep him healthy. (对划线部分提问)
______ _______ he be running for?
55. The blue backpack belongs to Sally. (改为反意疑问句)
The blue backpack belongs to Sally, _______ ______?
Ⅴ. 完形填空（每小题1分，共10分）
Peter and Paul passed by a small house on their way home late at night. They saw thick 56
coming out of its windows. “It’s on fire!” said Peter. “We 57 get help.”
The two 58 ran along the road shouting, “Fire! Fire!” They 59 at the door of the next house. They asked them to 60 the police and the firemen.
They ran back to the house. They saw 61 the window an old lady sitting in an armchair. It was clear that she 62 move.Peter and Paul tried hard to carry her out of the 63 and so they did! Some neighbors came and helped take some things out.
In no time the firemen 64 as well as the policemen. The fire was put out. The old lady cried sadly but she was not hurt. She 65 Peter and Paul and her neighbors again and again.
56. A. snow B. clouds C. fire D. smoke
57. A. can B. must C. may D. could
58. A. brothers B. firemen C. policemen D. sisters
59. A. beat B. locked C. opened D. knocked
60. A. tell B. report C. telephone D. find
61. A. at B. through C. above D. on
62. A. can not B. may not C. must not D. could not
63. A. armchair B. window C. house D. road
64. A. arrived B. fought C. left D. returned
65. A. belonged B. thanked C. pretended D. hated
Ⅵ. 阅读理解（每小题2分，共20分）
A
Dear Jenny,
Gary is having a potluck party after Month Exam! He invites all of us to come! Since it is a potluck party, I think I will bring some beef noodles. As I know, Lily will take care of the drinks and Gina will bring a big homemade chocolate cake. Can you ask your mom to buy us some KFC fried chicken? You know it is too far for all of us to ride a bike there, but your mom often drive there. We can pay the bill together. Just think about how surprised our classmates will feel when they see what we prepare! Isn’t it great? The party will start at noon on March 25, so be sure to be at Gary’s place around eleven-thirty to prepare for the party. By the way, don’t forget to invite Amy, who is good at music. If you have any other questions, just call me or write me back. Take care!
Leo
66. Who will take fried chicken to the party?
A. Leo. B. Gary. C. Lily. D. Jenny.
67. There will be_______of them for the party, besides Amy.
A. 5 B. 6 C. 7 D. 8
68. What does the underlined word “potluck” mean?
A. A meal cooked at home for some celebrations.
B. A free meal served by a church for children.
C. A meal served in a restaurant at special time.
D. A meal where guests bring food to share.
69. Why does Leo ask Jenny’s mom to buy the chicken?
A. Jenny lives close to the restaurant. B. He is afraid of spending much money.
C. It is far away for them to ride to buy it. D. He is busy preparing for the exam.
70. According to the email, which is true?
A. Gina is having a potluck party.
B. The party will start at 11:30.
C. Jenny has to pay for the fried chicken alone.
D. We don’t know if Amy will go to the party.
B
It is well-known that Albert Einstein was one of the greatest scientists of all time and he was also a really great person. Here are some interesting things about him.
When Einstein started to work in America, someone asked him what he needed. He said he needed a desk, some paper and a pencil. He also asked for a big waste-paper basket to hold all of his mistakes. This shows that he knew even the cleverest man in the world can only learn by making mistakes.
Einstein regarded time as a very important thing. He never wore socks and he thought putting on socks was a waste of time as people already wore shoes. He also thought it was a waste of time remembering things that could quickly be found in a book. That’s why he never remembered his own phone number, which was in the phone book. He knew what was worth remembering. It is true that if we are going to do great things in our lives, we cannot waste our time.
Einstein liked to joke, too. Once in an exam a student asked him why all the questions were the same as last year’s. Einstein replied that the questions were the same but the answers were different!
71. When Einstein began his work in America, he asked for some things except _______.
A. a desk B. some paper C. a pen D. a waste-paper basket
72. In one exam, Einstein _______.
A. asked different questions B. asked difficult questions
C. wanted the same answers D. wanted different answers
73. Einstein never remembered his own phone number because _______.
A. no one told him the number
B. he couldn’t remember it at all
C. he didn’t think it was worth remembering
D. he didn’t have a phone
74. According to the passage, which of the following is true?
A. Einstein had been to many countries except America.
B. Einstein thought people could learn from mistakes.
C. Einstein thought socks were as important as shoes.
D. Einstein didn’t like talking with others.
75. From the passage we learn _______.
A. Einstein thought time was very important
B. Einstein was too careful to make mistakes
C. Einstein made few jokes with his students
D. Einstein was a person who remembered everything clearly
Ⅶ. 补全对话（每小题2分，共10分）
从方框中选择句子完成对话，有两句为多余项。
A. It must be a UFO.
B. They must be making a movie.
C. She must be from the TV news.
D. I must have lost it.
E. He could be running for exercise.
F. I think I might leave it in the reading-room.
G. He might be running to catch a bus.
A: Hey, Mike! Look at that man running down the street. Why do you think he is running?
B: 76
A: No, I don’t think so! He’s wearing a suit.
B: 77
A: But there’s no bus on this road. Buses are not allowed to run here.
B: Oh! So maybe...he’s going to be late and run to work.
A: I don’t think so! He looks scared.
B: Yeha. Look! What’s that in the sky?
A: 78 And it’s landing.
B: Look at that lady with a camera.
A: 79
B: No. Look at those other people. They are actors. Oh! I see. 80
Ⅷ. 任务型阅读（每小题2分，共10分）
Some things can carry messages, for example, a sign at the bus stop helps you to know which bus to take. Signs on the door tell you where to go in or out. Have you ever noticed that there are a lot of signs around you and that you receive messages from them all the time?
People can communicate on many other ways. An artist can use his drawing to tell about beautiful mountains, about the blue sea and many other things. Books are written to tell you about all the wonderful things in the world and also about people and their ideas.
Books, magazines, TVs, radios and films all help us to communicate with others. They all help us to know what is going on in the world and what other people are thinking about.
81. What can help you if you want to know which bus to take?
82. What do the signs on the door do?
83. People can communicate in many other ways, can’t they?
84. What can help us to communicate with others?
85. What do they help us to do?
Ⅸ. 书面表达（共10分）
在班级里，同学们都有自己的爱好和心爱之物，看到了篮球你会想到它是……的，因为……喜欢打篮球；看到了一本故事书、一张CD、一个时尚的背包，你又会想到谁呢？请根据以上提示和自己的生活实际，写一段话(80词左右)。
同步随堂测试 Unit 6
满分120分，限时100分钟，得分_______
第二部分 英语知识运用
Ⅰ. 根据句意和汉语或首字母提示补全单词（每小题1分，共10分）
21. The art museum is (展览) the new paintings it has bought.
22. They are working with _______ (活力) and never stop to have a rest at work.
23. I took many _______ (照片) when I visited the Great Wall.
24. His father died two years ago because of _______ (癌症).
25. The apples taste very _______ (甜的) and I like them very much.
26. —Which do you p , coffee or tea?
—Neither, I’d like some water.
27. I am e a telephone call from my mother in America. I miss her very much.
28. If you looking for e_______, stay at home and watch TV.
29. He r me of his father，because he looks like his father very much.
30. We like music that has great l_______.
Ⅱ. 单项选择（每小题1分，共15分）
31. I love singers _______ can write their own music.
A. when B. which C. who D. what
32. Some of the famous person’s photos are _______ display in this exhibition after he died.
A. on B. in C. at D. about
33. Action movies _______ me of Jackie Chan.
A. remind B. think C. hear D. miss
34. Your story _______me greatly. I’ve never heard such funny story before.
A. interesting B. interested C. interests D. interested in
35. This tomato tastes _______. I like it very much.
A. interesting B. well C. sweet D. boring
36. _______ you do, it doesn’t matter to me.
A. What B. Which C. When D. Whatever
37. My grandma prefers_______ a walk to _______ in front of the TV.
A. taking; sit B. taking; sitting C. take; sitting D. take; sit
38. As the name_______，this song is very gentle.
A. thinks B. suggests C. looks D. notices
39. —Don’t make any noise in movie theatre.
—_______.
A. Sorry, I can’t B. Sorry, I won’t C. Yes, I will D. Yes, I won’t
40. Jack is _____honest boy. He is very popular.
A. a B. an C. the D. /
41. —Mum, I have passed the final exam.
—_______.
A. That’s all right B. Work hard C. Good luck D. Congratulations
42. The blouse _______ is made of silk is very expensive. I can’t afford it.
A. that B. what C. because D. though
43. I don’t like the movies _______ are very boring.
A. who B. what C. that D. where
44. I really dislike the movies ______last too long.
A. who B. what C. that D. where
45. —Dinner is ready. Help yourself.
—Wow! It ______delicious. Could you please tell me how to cook it?
A. tastes B. looks C. sounds D. feels
Ⅲ. 句型转换(每小题2分，共10分)
46. He says that he likes classical music better than rock music.(改为同义句)
He says that he______ classical music _______ rock music.
47. I like the singer. The singer writes his own lyrics.(变为含有定语从句的复合句)
I like the singer ______ _______his own lyrics.
48. The song made me think of my grandma. (改为同义句)
The song ______ me _____ my grandma.
49. The pictures on show are really nice.(改为同义句)
The pictures ______ _______ are really nice.
50. The girl with long hair is Lucy’s sister. (改为同义句)
The girl ______ _______ long hair is Lucy’s sister.
Ⅳ. 选词并用其适当形式填空（每小题1分，共5分）
catch , late, main, taste, agree
51. This story ______tells us the ways to keep safe.
52. How beautiful she is! She is dressing in the ______ Paris fashion.
53. Some scientists says ______food is bad for your health.
54. My parents are in ______ on what color to paint the house.
55. If you get up late, you won’t ______the bus.
Ⅴ. 完形填空（每小题1分，共10分）
Mrs. Black was a famous musician several years ago. She 56 music at a school and her students did well in their lessons.
They liked her very much. Now the old woman stays at home with her husband. The old man looks after his wife well and she is 57 worried about anything. And she is very 58 .
Just like some old people, Mrs. Black finds that her 59 is falling. Sometimes she forgets what she did or will do. It often gets her in trouble. Her 60 noticed it and asked her to see a famous doctor who lives in the capital. He bought two tickets 61 London and told her to put 62 into her handbag while she was playing the piano. The next morning, when they got to the 63 just on time to catch the plane, Mrs. Black said, “I wish we’d brought the
64 with us.”
“Don’t be a fool, dear!” said Mr. Black. “We’re going to hold a concert,but to see a
65 .”
“ I know,” she said, “but I’ve left the tickets on it!”
56. A. loved B. taught C. enjoy D. studied
57. A. always B. often C. never D. sometimes
58. A. sorry B. worried C. sad D. happy
59. A. sight B. hearing C. interest D. memory
60. A. husband B. daughter C. son D. student
61. A. for B. in C. from D. of
62. A. it B. them C. this D. that
63. A. airport B. bus stop C. station D. harbor(海港)
64. A. money B. music C. tickets D. piano
65. A. doctor B. film C. play D. house
Ⅵ. 阅读理解（每小题2分，共20分）
A
Jeffery Poe, a student who studies computer at Texas University, found his own parents with the help of the Internet. The news got around soon and many of his friends came to share
his happiness. Some of them even asked him to help them find jobs on the Internet.
Before he turned to the Internet for help, Jeffery had spent one year looking for his parents who left him 26 years ago when he was a baby. Using knowledge on computer and network, he sent a notice to the Internet in the hope of finding his parents. Only one day later, Jeffery’s dream came true.
When Jeffery flew to Los Angeles to meet his father, Stephen, they embraced each other lovingly and warmly. They enjoyed the family meeting. Later on Mother’s Day, Jeffery met his mother Silvia.
Three years ago, Stephen himself also tried hard to look for his son, but his hard try ended in nothing. Jeffery’s try on the Internet has turned to be a happy ending.
66. Which of the following we cannot know from the passage?
A. Jeffery’s birth information. B. Where Jeffery’s father lives.
C. When Jeffery’s parents left him. D. What Jeffery does.
67. Why couldn’t Jeffery find his parents a year ago?
A. Because his parents didn’t want to see him. B. Because he couldn’t get useful information.
C. Because he didn’t want to. D. Because he was just a student.
68. The underlined word “share” in Paragraph1 means ______.
A. to ask about B. to give back
C. to have something with others D. to study together
69. How long did it take Jeffery to find his parents on the Internet with a notice?
A. Three years. B. Two years. C. Less than one year. D. Only one day.
70. Jeffery was happy because ______ .
A. his parents were still alive B. he was a student at Texas University
C. he found his parents in the end D. his parents also looked for their son
B
Popular music in America is what every student likes. Students carry small radios with earphones and listen to music before class, after class, and at lunch. Students buy large speakers and play the music loudly as they drive on the street.
Adult drivers listen to music on the car radio as they drive to work. They also listen to the news about sports, the weather, and the life of American people. Most of the radio programs are music.
Popular music singers make much money. They make a CD or tape which radio stations use in many places. Once the popular singer is heard all over the country, young people buy his or her tape. Some of the money from these tapes goes to the singer. Wherever the singer goes, all the young people want to meet him or her. Now the singer has become a national star.
There are other kinds of music that are important to Americans. One is called folk music. It tells stories about the common life of Americans. Another is called western or country music. This is started by cowboys who would sing at night to the cows they were watching. Today, any music about country life and the love between a country boy and
his girl is called western or country music.
71. How many kinds of music are mentioned in this passage?
A. Two B. Three C. Four D. Five
72. When pop singers _____, they will become national stars.
A. make much money B. make a CD or tape
C. are loved by all the young people D. are wanted to sing on the radio
73. From the passage we know that country music is about the _______.
A. common life of Americans B. country life and love stories
C. life of cowboys D. American’s music and stores
74. Which of the following is true according to this passage?
A. Few students in America like popular music.
B. Everyone in America wants to meet pop singer wherever they go.
C. Adult drivers in America listen to music all the time while driving.
D. Students with cars in America like to listen to music while driving.
75. What would be the best title for this passage?
A. American Music B. Popular Music C. History of Music D. Western Music
Ⅶ. 补全对话（每小题2分，共10分）
A: Eric, do you think music is popular all over the world?
B: Yes, 76 . Music is really wonderful.
A: 77 ?
B: Mmm, I like music that I can sing along with because I like singing.
A: I like music 78 . You know, dancing is my favorite.
B: That’s great. If you are waiting for a bus, listening to music can 79 .
A: Yes. Do you know that music has many different kinds? For example, 80 and so on.
B: I agree with you. Music is always around us. And it brings lots of happiness to us.
Ⅷ. 任务型阅读（每小题2分，共10分）
One of the strangest jobs at the Oscars is that of a seat-filler. When one of the stars needs to go to the bathroom, a seat-filler sits in the star’s seat. That way, the TV
cameras won’t show any empty seats. Kathy Muller talks about her night as a seat-filler.
( 81) I was told to reach the theater in the middle of the day, wearing my dress for the evening. There were about 200 of us seat-fillers, all very excited. We were told what we should and shouldn’t do (for example, “Don’t talk to the stars”) , and then ( 82) 我们一直等到五点钟。 That’s when the stars started coming.
The show started at six o’clock. We had to stand outside the doors. Then, when someone went to the bathroom or had a cigarette(香烟) , we were told to go and sit in their seat. (83) The show was three hours long, and I only sat down five times. By the end, I was really tired, but I was happy because, during the evening, I sat behind Jim Carrey ( he’s very tall !) and close to Denzel Washington, Nicole Kidman and Julia Roberts. It was an exciting night, but I think (84) _______ year I’ll watch the Oscars on TV at home like everyone else !
阅读短文，按要求写句子。
81. 将划线部分改写成同义句。
I was told to_______ at the theater at_______.
82. 将划线部分译成英语______________________________
83. 将划线部分译成汉语_____________________________
84. 在空白处填入一个适当的词语______________________
85. 从短文中找出两个描写心情的形容词:
___________________________________________
Ⅸ. 书面表达（共10分）
假如你是Emily，你的父母来北京为奥运会工作，你随父母到北京四中就读，为了让你的同学了解你，请根据在下列表格中的信息作自我介绍，向大家谈谈你自己的喜好及其原因。
Personal Date
Name：Emily
Sex：Female
Country of birth：USA
Name
Reason
Band
F4
energetic good singers
Book
Harry Potter
magical power, exciting
Music
Light music
quiet and gentle
Movie
Titanic
beautiful actors, sad
要求：1. 语句通顺，意思连贯，符合逻辑；
2. 结构完整，语法正确，书写工整，卷面整洁；
3. 词数80左右。
同步随堂测试 Unit 7
满分120分，限时100分钟，得分_______
.第二部分 英语知识运用
Ⅰ. 根据句意和汉语或首字母提示补全单词（每小题1分，共10分）
21. Harbin is cold at this time of year. You need to p_______ warm clothes if you go there.
22. The Party and government p_______ us with food and clothes.
23. There are two busy u_______ supermarkets in our city.
24. —Do you like drinking w_______?
—No, I like drinking beer.
25. It’s not heavy. It’s l_______.
26. Mr. Black has t_______ many Chinese books into English.
27. Notre Dame Cathedral is one of the famous ______(教堂) in the world.
28. I don’t want to see _______(令人毛骨悚然的) movies, but my best friend likes them very much.
29. I’d like to ______(长途跋涉) through the jungle because I like exciting vacations.
30. It’s best for you to _______(考虑) the question carefully.
Ⅱ. 单项选择（每小题1分，共15分）
31. —Would you like to play basketball with us?
—_______
A. Thank you. B. Never mind. C. Why not? D. It doesn’t matter.
32. They are willing _______ in my firm.
A. work B. working C. to work D. worked
33. —What are you going to do this Sunday?
—I’d like _______ some washing.
A. doing B. to do C. do D. will do
34. I was allowed to continue _______ the library.
A. use B. have used C. using D. used
35. —I hope to visit Hawaii one day.
—I do, too. But it’s too _______ and crowded in summer.
A. thrilling B. fascinating C. tired D. tiring
36. The two men trekked _______ the forest and got to a small house.
A. across B. through C. crossing D. over
37. It took _______ people about two years_______ the bridge.
A. thousands of; building B. thousand of; to build
C. thousands of; to build D. thousand of; building
38. The foreigner loves the places _______ the people are very friendly.
A. how B. where C. what D. that
39. —Can you provide us _______ some information _______ the computer?
—Of course.
A. for; with B. with; about C. about; with D. with; with
40. I’d _______ to come to see you next week.
A. hope B. wish C. want D. like
41. —People in Hong Kong are very friendly.
—Yes, but it’s too _______ this time of year.
A. tourist B. tour C. touristy D. touring
42. Many students said they dreamed ______ flying to the moon one day.
A. at B. about C. in D. of
43. —Could you tell me where we’re going for our next vacation?
—Why not consider _______ Sydney?
A. visit B. to visit C. visiting D. visits
44. _______of the students were late because of the bad weather.
A. Quite a few B. A few quite C. Many D. Few quite a
45. Many workers want to go home as _______ as possible.
A. quick B. soon C. much D. more quickly
Ⅲ. 选词并用其适当形式填空（每小题1分，共5分）
tire, translate, education, fall, include
46. Parents should buy some ______ books for children to read.
47. Have you ever been to Niagara_______?
48. I think that was long and _______ journey and we felt very tired.
49. Uncle Li is a _______, he has translated many books.
50. I had some fruits _______ an apple and two bananas.
Ⅳ.句型转换（每小题2分，共10分）
51. I’d like to go to Singapore on vacation.(就划线部分提问)
______ _______ you _______ to go on vacation?
52. I hope that I can visit Beijing some day. （改为同义句）
I hope _______ ______ Beijing some day.
53. The weather is always warm in these places. I like them.（合并为一句）
I like the places _______ the weather _______ always warm.
54. What other things can you tell me?（改为同义句）
_______ ______ can you tell me?
55. I spent two hours on my homework.（改为同义句）
It _____ me two hours _______do my homework.
Ⅴ. 完形填空（每小题1分，共10分）
There is a holiday next week and I can’t decide what to do.I have a lot of work to do 56 and this would be a good chance(机会) to do it. But I don’t like 57 the holiday in this way. I can work at home all the rest of the year. Last year I went 58 to the
mountains. Everything there was beautiful, but it is too cold this time of the year. And it’s really 59 far to go for a short holiday. I decide that this isn’t a good time to go to the mountains. But I 60 to go somewhere else.
Perhaps this would be a good chance to go to the beach. I like to go for walks 61 the seashore 62 the warm sunshine and watch the water. It’s only eight miles and I could get there 63 about two hours. After thinking it 64 , I am sure that this is a better time for the seashore than 65 .
56. A. at home B. at house C. in school D. in factory
57. A. to pass B. to spend C. having D. asking
58. A. the north B. from north C. north D. to north
59. A. very B. enough C. rather D. too
60. A. do want B. shall want C. wanted D. am wanting
61. A. on B. by C. beside D. along
62. A. on B. during C. in D. under
63. A. in B. for C. with D. after
64. A. in B. out C. over D. on
65. A. home B. the mountains C. big cities D. country villages
Ⅵ. 阅读理解（每小题2分，共20分）
A
A Trip to the Forest
One day Bob took two of his friends into the mountains. They put up their tents(帐篷) and then rode off to a forest to see how the trees were growing.
In the afternoon when they were about ten kilometers from their camp, it started to snow. More and more snow fell. Soon Bob could hardly see his hands before his face. He could not find the road. Bob knew there were two roads. One road went to the camp, and the other went to his house. But all was white snow. Everything was the same. How could he take his friends back to the camp?
Bob had an idea. The horses! Let the horses take them back! But what would happen if the horses took the road to his house? That would be a trip of t
hirty-five kilometers in such cold weather!
It was getting late. They rode on and on. At last the horses stopped. Where were they? None of them could tell. John looked around. What was that under the tree? It was one of their tents!
66. John and his two friends went to the forest to _______.
A. build their camp
B. find their way home
C. enjoy the mountains in the snow
D. watch the trees in the forest
67. They could not find their way back because _______.
A. there was only one road to their camp
B. they couldn’t decide which of the two roads led to their tents
C. there were no roads in the mountains at all
D. everything was covered by the white snow
68. It is clear that they wanted the horses to take them to _______.
A. John’s house B. the camp C. the forest D. the mountains
69. The horses stopped because _______.
A. it was getting late
B. they were tired after running for a long way
C. they knew that they had got to the camp
D. they had seen John’s house
70. The story happened _______.
A. on a cold winter day
B. on a dark snowy evening
C. in a cold camp far from villages
D. at night when nothing could be seen
B
Traveling can be a fun way to get life experiences, especially during Spring Break—a week long school holiday in the United States.
But what will you do if you’re a student and don’t have enough money for a trip? Don’t worry.
Here are some useful tips.
Save: This may be the most important preparation for traveling. Cut expenses and save money so you’ll have more choices about where to go and how to get there.
Plan ahead: Don’t wait until the last minute to plan your trip. Tickets may cost more when bought in a hurry. Giving yourself several months to get ready can mean security and savings.
Plan sensibly（合理地）: Write down what you expect to spend on food and hotels. Stick to your plan or you may not have enough money to cover everything.
Travel in groups: Find someone who is interested in visiting the same places. By traveling with others you can share costs and experiences.
Work as you go: Need more money to support your trip? Look for work in the places you visit.
Choose places: Tourist cities may be expensive. You may want to rethink your trip and go to a less known area. Smaller towns can have many interesting activities and sights.
Pack necessary things: The most important things to take are not always clothes. Remember medicine in case you get sick and snacks in case you cannot find a cheap restaurant.
Use the Internet or travel books: No matter where you go, study the places you will visit. Decide what to see. The net can help to save money. Some useful websites include www.travelocity.com, www. bargains–lowestfare.com and www.economy-travel. com. Travel books will give you the information on the cheapest hotels and restaurants.
By planning sensibly, even students can enjoy the travel. Your travel experiences will be remembered for a lifetime.
7l. Before your trip, the first thing you should do is _____.
A. to decide where to go B. to get information on the Internet
C. to cut expenses and save money D. to buy tickets in advance
72. The writer advises you ______.
A. to share costs with any other people B. not to go to well-known places
C. not to visit dangerous places D. to buy anything you want to buy
73. To prepare for your trip, you ______.
A. need more medicine than clothes
B. should look for work all the way
C. should make good use of the Internet and travel books
D. can gain valuable life experiences
74. Which of the following is NOT true?
A. If you don’t have enough money for a trip, you may save money.
B. Tickets may cost more when bought in a hurry.
C. Stick to your plan or you may not have enough money to cover everything.
D. Hotels will give you the information on the cheapest hotels and restaurants.
75. Which of the following can be used as the title of this passage?
A. Planning Your Trip Cleverly B. Traveling without Much Money
C. Information Decides All D. Security Is above All while Traveling
Ⅶ. 补全对话（每小题2分，共10分）
从方框中选择句子完成对话，有两句为多余项。
A: Would you like to go on a vacation with me next year?
B: Yeah. 76
A: 77
B: Well, I hope to visit Hawaii. Are you interested in going there?
A: 78 I like places where the weather is always warm. But Hawaii is too touristy. 79
B: Well, Mexico would be nice, but we don’t know the language. 80
A: That’s not a bad idea!
A. Where would we go?
B. How about going to see Niagara Falls?
C. Maybe we could go to Mexico.
D. No, not really.
E. That sounds wonderful!
F. When would you like to go?
G . Sure!
Ⅷ. 任务型阅读（每小题2分，共10分）
San Francisco is a city on hay. It has an international atmosphere and it is the fourth largest city in California, with a population of about 800,000.
San Francisco has a large immigrant population from Europe, the America and Asia. It has a Chinatown, a Japan town and a Hispanic area, called Mission District. It has over 4,200 restaurants offering cuisine from many countries.
The Golden Gate Bridge, Fisherman’s Wharf, the Asian Art Museum, Alcatraz （亚卡拉：恶魔）and the Twin Peaks are just a few of the many tourist attractions in San Francisco. The city is an ideal place for young people. There are lots of movie theatres, concert halls, theatres and discos.
San Francisco has a Mediterranean climate, with warm winters and cool summers. It is usually rainy between November and April and sometimes, it is foggy in the evening.
Name of city
San Francisco
State
81. _______
Population
82. _______
Restaurants
83. _______
Tourist attractions
84. _______
Climate
85. _______
Ⅸ. 书面表达（共10分）
假设你可以去你想去的任何地方,请根据下面的问题提示，结合自身实际情况，对寒假的旅游进行设想。要求：80词左右。
问题提示：1. How would you travel?
2. Where would you go?
3. What would you do?
4. Why would you go there?
5. How long would you stay for?
6. Who would you take?
同步随堂测试 Unit 8
满分120分，限时100分钟，得分_______
第二部分 英语知识运用
Ⅰ. 根据句意和汉语或首字母提示补全单词（每小题1分，共10分）
21. You can see many traffic _______ (标志) along the main road.
22. The club has _______ (设立) a new rule allowing women to join.
23. Do you often help him _______ (训练) the football team?
24. During summer holiday, he even handed out the _______ (广告) at a local supermarket.
25. We greatly _______ (感激) your help for the development of our school.
26. He takes after my father and he isn’t s_______ to his mother.
27. We couldn’t i _______ what he looked like ten years ago.
28. My computer doesn’t work. Uncle Wang is going to r_______ it for me tomorrow.
29. I don’t know she is b_______. She can’t see anything.
30. The poor little girl’s parents had no food to eat and died of h_______.
Ⅱ. 单项选择（每小题1分，共15分）
31. He is very kind, and he’d like to help _____ children.
A. rich B. homeless C. happy D. smart
32. These young volunteers could help ______ the city parks.
A. clean B. clean up C. cleaning up D. cleans up
33. She is planning on driving. Let’s help her _______ some good ideas.
A. stay up B. call up C. look up D. think up
34. The new teacher _______ new books to all the students this morning.
A. handed in B. gave up C. handed out D. gave away
35. —I’m sorry I’m late, because the traffic is bad.
—_______, but tomorrow, please be on time.
A. It’s a pleasure B. You’re welcome C. It doesn’t matter D.That’s right
36. —What does she look like?
—She _______ her mother.
A. takes after B. similar to C. looks after D. takes care of
37. A new government was _______ in that country last month.
A. set up B. put up C. stay up D. fixed up
38. Though you’re very busy, You can’t put off ______our plan.
A. make B. making C. to make D. made
39. The government has _______ many tents for the homeless people.
A. put away B. put on C. put up D. put down
40. My father _____ me _____when I failed the exam.
A. helped; out B. came; out C. handed; out D. gave; out
41. Tony is similar _______ his grandpa. It’s very interesting.
A. to B. with C. by D. after
42. You could visit the sick kids in the hospital to _______.
A. cheer up them B. cheer them up C. take after them D. look them after
43. Please ______ the cup ____water.
A. put; with B. fill; with C. full; with D. give; to
44. It’s ______ that you have given us so much help.
A. appreciated B. good C. nice D. pleasure
45. Tom, please ______me the books in that room．
A. take B. bring C. carry D. fetch
Ⅲ. 根据汉语提示完成下列句子（每小题2分，共10分）
46. 格林先生张贴了一些征集旧汽车的广告。
Mr. Green _____ _____ some advertisements ______ _______old cars.
47. ——迈克， 你的房间太乱！你应当清扫一下。
——抱歉，我马上就去。
—Mike, your room is a mess! You should _______ it ______.
—Sorry, I’ll do it _____ ______.
48. 运动会由于糟糕的天气被推迟到下周。
The sports meeting has been ______ ______ until next week because of the bad weather.
49. 你知道谁在校门口分发广告了吗？
Do you know who has _______ ______ _ advertisements at the school gate?
50. 我准备带我奶奶去戏院，以使她高兴起来。
I am going to take my grandma to the theatre to _______ her _______.
Ⅳ. 完形填空（每小题1分，共15分）
Rosa liked making up stories. She was so 51 that her classmates believed her from time to time. In fact, the whole class believed her! At first she supposed it was 52 . Now, as she got up to 53 before the class, she knew that make–believe stories had some way of coming back to make you sad.
Rosa’s parents were separated. Nine months out of the year, Rosa lived with her mother in an apartment on Anderson Street. But when summer 54 , she went to her father’s farm in Arizona.
The farm was great! Rosa rode horses and 55 with some farm work. Her father, however, was so 56 that he couldn’t find time to go places with her. When she arrived each summer, her father would 57 her at the airport and take her out to eat. And the day she went back to the 58 he would always buy her a present.
When summer came to a close, Rosa 59 to her mother. At school she heard lots of stories her friends told about their family trips. Rosa wished she had a 60 to talk about.
Not long after 61 began, Rosa was looking through travel magazines in the school library. They talked about many exciting 62 , like England and Germany. When Rosa’s friends asked what she had done that summer, she made up something that was not 63 . Remembering the travel magazines she had looked at, she told her classmates that she and her father had gone to 64 .
When the class began studying England, Mr. Thomas asked Rosa to tell all the things she could 65 about her trip to England!
51. A. afraid B. worried C. sure D. happy
52. A. joke B. fun C. turn D. game
53. A. talk B. teach C. show D. travel
54. A. passed B. arrived C. lasted D. changed
55. A. made B. played C. helped D. did
56. A. weak B. pleased C. busy D. lonely
57. A. show B. visit C. meet D. send
58. A. farm B. city C. family D. school
59. A. wrote B. called C. moved D. returned
60. A. family B. school C. teacher D. farm
61. A. meeting B. school C. summer D. talk
62. A. people B. cities C. languages D. places
63. A. interesting B. true C. long D. same
64. A. England B. Germany C. farm D. home
65. A. think B. see C. remember D. read
Ⅴ. 阅读理解（每小题2分，共20分）
A
The Grade 4 students at the Clean City School collect empty bottles. In June, they are
going to take them to a recycling(回收) center. They are going to sell the bottles and buy
some books for the school library.
Kate has started a graph(图表) to show the number of the bottles they have collected. This
is the graph.
Students Bottle Collection
The months of the School Year
66. Why do the students collect empty bottles? Because they _______.
A. want to do something for their school B. like empty bottles very much
C. want to play with the bottles D. want to sell them to buy balls
67. In February the students collected _______empty bottles.
A. 80 B. 60 C. 40 D. 20
68. The students collected ______ more bottles in April than in May.
A. 10 B. 20 C. 30 D. 40
69. From the graph above, we know that the students picked up the same number of bottles
in ______ and ______.
A. October; February B. September; April C. January; May D. March; September
70. During the first three months of this year, the students collected _______empty bottles.
A. 120 B. 180 C. 200 D. 310
B
A friend of mine named Paul received an expensive car from his brother as a Christmas present. On Christmas Eve when Paul came out of his office a street urchin(顽童) was walking around a shining car. “Is this your car, Paul?” he asked.
Paul answered,“Yes, my brother gave it to me for Christmas.”The boy was surprised.“You mean your brother gave it to you and it didn’t cost you anything. Boy, I wish…” He hesitated(犹豫).
Of course Paul knew what he was going to wish for. He was going to wish he had a brother like that. But what the boy said surprised Paul greatly.
“I wish,”the boy went on,“that I could be a brother like that.”Paul looked at the boy in surprise, then he said again,“Would you like to take a ride in my car?”
“Oh, yes, I’d love that.”
After a short ride, the boy turned and with his eyes shining, said，“Paul, would you
mind driving in front of my house?”
Paul smiled a little. He thought he knew what the boy wanted. He wanted to show his neighbors that he could ride home in a big car. But Paul was wrong again,“Will you stop where those two steps are?”the boy asked.
He ran up to the steps（楼梯）. Then in a short while Paul heard him coming back, but he was not coming fast. He was carrying his little crippled(残疾) brother. He sat him down on the step and pointed to the car.
“There she is. Buddy, just like I told you upstairs. His brother gave it to him for Christmas and it didn’t cost him a cent. And some day I’m going to give you one just like it...then you can see for yourself all nice things in the Christmas window that I’ve been trying to tell you about.”
Paul got out and lifted the boy to the front seat of his car. The shining-eyed older brother climbed in beside him and the three of them began an unforgettable holiday ride.
71. The street urchin was very surprised when_______.
A. Paul received an expensive car B. Paul told him about the car
C. he saw the shining car D. he was walking around the car
72. From the story we can see the urchin _______.
A. wished to give his brother a car
B. wanted Paul’s brother to give him a car
C. wished he could have a brother like Paul’s
D. wished Paul could be a brother like that
73. The urchin asked Paul to stop his car in front of his house_______.
A. to show his neighbors the big car
B. to show he had a rich friend
C. to let Paul know his brother
D. to let his brother know about his wish
74. We can infer(推断) from the story that______.
A. Paul couldn’t understand the urchin
B. the urchin had a deep love for his brother
C. the urchin wished to have a rich brother
D. the urchin’s wish came true in the end
75. The best name of the story is ______.
A. Christmas Present B. Street Urchin
C. Brother Like That D. An Unforgettable Holiday Ride
Ⅵ. 补全对话（每小题2分，共10分）
A: Hello, Mrs. Tan. I’d like to 76 a volunteer. Can you help me?
B: Sure. What 77 of volunteer work would you like to do?
A: Well, I like working 78 kids.
B: Do you know 79 to play basketball? We need someone to help coach kids basketball.
A: No, I don’t really like basketball. Is there anything 80 ?
B: There is a job cleaning 81 the parks. It’s every Sunday.
A: That’s no good. I help take 82 of my grandmother on Sundays.
B: Oh, I see. Here is another 83 . Do you know how to fix up bicycle?
A: Sorry. I can’t even repair my own bicycle.
B: OK. 84 this is a good one. We need someone to read to people in the hospital. You can do it any day you like.
A: That sounds good. 85 do I start?
B: How about today?
Ⅶ. 任务型阅读（每小题2分，共10分）
(86)_______ Scientists believe the material(材料,原料) gives off a bad gas(气体) in strong sunlight. The gas can make people seriously ill. (87)_______ It’s said that 15 students in Taipei got sick after having gym class on the playgrounds. They want schools to use sand playgrounds as we did in the old days.
A professor from Qingdao doesn’t agree. “In strong heat and sunlight, there is only a little bad gas, ” he said. “(88)_______ ” He believes the problems at the schools in Taiwan were caused by poor quality(质量) material. Wang Hui, an engineer from
Guangdong, agrees with the professor, “Students usually don’t stay very long on the playground.” Also, the new playground will make students get hurt less than before. Some schools don’t use the new playgrounds because they are so expensive that they can’t afford them. (89)_______
任务一:根据短文内容把下面四句话放回原处。
A. Some schools can build new playgrounds, but they cannot have more grassland.
B. The material of playgrounds in schools around China may be bad for children’s health.
C. Playgrounds are usually outdoors, so the gas isn’t strong enough to do something bad for students’ health.
D. They want schools not to use the material.
任务二:在短文中找出一个词代替划线单词“poor”。
90. _______
Ⅷ. 书面表达（共10分）
假设下星期天是你们学校的志愿日，你们班打算去敬老院和幼儿园（kindergarten）做志愿者工作。请你为你们班制定80词左右的计划。
参考词汇：
sing for the old, cheer them up, play games with the children, teach them to read
同步随堂测试 Unit 9
满分120分，限时100分钟，得分_______
第二部分 英语知识运用
Ⅰ. 根据句意和汉语或首字母提示补全单词（每小题1分，共10分）
21. Xi’an is an _______ (古老的) city. Have you ever been there?
22. At this moment she _______(注意到) her father coming in.
23. Wheat and rice are mostly _______(生产) in our country.
24. We shouldn’t _______(扔) waste paper everywhere.
25. Some children _______ (发展) more slowly than others.
26. Her mother is a very p_______ person to live with.
27. They were carrying several b_______ of fruit to the market.
28. I don’t like the taste of lemons. They are too s _______.
29. The telephone was i _______in 1876.
30. The song r______ me of my childhood.
Ⅱ. 单项选择（每小题1分，共15分）
31. On my way home, I met one of my best old friends _______.
A. on accident B. by accident C. for accident D. with accident
32. This kind of tea _______ in Southern China.
A. produced B. is produced C. is invented D. is found
33. It’s used for_______ clearly in the dark.
A. seeing B. see C. looking D. look
34. —Your city looks beautiful!
—Yes. Lots of trees and grass_______ last year.
A. are planted B. have planted C. were planting D. were planted
35. —When _____ the flowers ______?
—Two hours ago.
A. did; water B. was; watered C. are; watered D. were ; watered
36. I like this kind of drink because it has a sweet _______.
A. sound B. energy C. tasty D. taste
37. Students should be ______ in class.
A. act B. active C. action D. activity
38. I took the wrong train_______ , I didn’t even know it until half an hour later.
A. by mistakes B. by mistake C. with mistake D. with mistakes
39. _______, he collected a lot of stamps.
A. On the way B. In the way C. By the way D. In this way
40. The kind of tea produces a _______ smell.
A. please B. pleasant C. pleasure D. pleased
41. The old man _______ many songs.
A. created B. made C. found D. produced
42. The bridge _______ by the farmers themselves in 2002.
A. built B. was built C. build D. was build
43. —Never touch my computer while I’m away.
—_______.
A. I shouldn’t B. I mustn’t C. I won’t D. I don’t
44. The first computer _______ in 1945.
A. was invented B. was discovered C. invented D. discover
45. Can you make up a conversation _______ the information?
A. accord to B. according for C. according to D. accord for
Ⅲ. 选词并用其适当形式填空（每小题1分，共5分）
46. My little brother likes playing _______(wood) toys.
47. I’m trying my best to _______ (development) my English speaking skills.
48. I tasted the hot _______ (mix). It was quite delicious.
49. I’ve got a cold, so I’ve lost my sense of _______ (tasty).
50. I think light is the most _______ (help) invention.
Ⅳ. 句型转换(每小题2分，共10分)
51. The computer was bought by my father last month. (改为主动语态)
My father _______ the computer last month.
52. People use metal for making machines. (改为被动语态)
Metal_______ ______ _______ making machines.
53. They were invented by Julie Thompson.(对划线部分提问)
_______ ______ they invented by?
54. This kind of car was invented in 1985 . (对划线部分提问)
_______ _____this kind of car _______?
55. The water is used for watering the flowers. (对划线部分提问)
_______ ______the water used for ?
Ⅴ. 完形填空（每小题1分，共10分）
Thomas Edison lived in America. He invented plenty of electrical appliance(电器) and 56 people know him.
At that time there was no electric lamp(电灯) in the world. And it brought people 57 . Young Edison decided to 58 it. He didn’t know which material（材料） was suited to be a lamp filament(灯丝). He 59 many times and he spent a lot of time on it. Some friends of his asked him to 60 the experiments but he didn’t listen to them and tried his best to find the 61 .
One afternoon a friend of his came to visit him. He was doing his experiment in the lab 62 the man came in. But he only asked his friend to 63 and didn’t stop to talk with him. The man sat for a long time and Edison said nothing to him. He was 64 Edison and said. “You’ve done the experiments 1,200 times but you’ve failed 1,200 times.” “You’re right, my friend,” Edison went on doing his experiments and said. “But I have known 1,200 materials 65 to be a lamp filament.”
56. A. most B. few C. a few D. some
57. A. much trouble B. much pleasure C. safety D. comfort
58. A. find B. invent C. like D. discover
59. A. won B. failed C. lost D. got
60. A. begin B. go on with C. stop D. try out
61. A. lamp B. material C. appliance D. people
62. A. before B. after C. as soon as D. when
63. A. sit down B. go out C. go home D. help him
64. A. pleased with B. angry with C. polite to D. thankful to
65. A. are suited B. aren’t C. are enough D. can work
Ⅵ. 阅读理解（每小题2分，共20分）
A
Man invented a lot of sports equipments(器材). The first true piece was the ball.
Thousands of years ago, in Egypt(埃及), the children’s favorite game was throwing stones. But a badly thrown stone could hurt a child. Looking for something less dangerous to throw, the people in Egypt made the first balls.
At first, they used tree leaves to make balls. They used vines(藤) to keep the leaves together. Later they began to use pieces of animal skin and fill them with some light things. These balls were much better than the old ones.
Before long they invented a lot of ball games, each had its own rules. They began to play these ball games according to the rules. They thought that ball playing was one of the best ways to teach the young men to be brave and strong.
66. _______ , so the Egyptians invented balls instead.
A. Throwing stones was a popular game for children
B. Stones were too heavy to throw
C. Stones might hurt children
D. They hadn’t so many stones
67. The Egyptians preferred playing balls to throwing stones because_______.
A. balls were lighter than stones
B. they were looking for something
C. balls were easy to make
D. throwing stones was more dangerous
68. The Egyptians made the first balls with_______.
A. leaves and vines B. animal skin C. something light D. something better
69. The Egyptians invented _______ very long ago.
A. many different kinds of games B. many different games with balls
C. throwing stones D. dangerous games
70. Ball playing_______.
A. would teach the young men how to play games
B. would make the young people healthier
C. could be more interesting
D. could be the best way to study well
B
The car was invented just a century ago. You may know all kinds of cars’ names; but many people don’t know who was the inventor of the first car. The first car was invented by an American. His name was Henry Ford.
Henry was born in a poor family. He was the eldest of six children. When he was a boy, he became interested in watches and machines. When he was twelve years old, his mother died. Soon he had to work in a machine shop for two dollars and fifty cents a week. In the evenings he repaired watches for another dollar a week. The hard life made him strong and able.
At that time there was another interest in the life of young Ford. He wished to make a machine. It could run without a horse, so named horseless carriage. He worked hard and in April 1893, the “horseless carriage” was invented at last. It was the first car. So Henry Ford was really the inventor of the first car in the world.
71. Who was the inventor of the first car?
A. Henry Stephenson B. George Stephenson C. Henry Ford D. George Ford
72. When did his mother die?
A. His mother died in April 1893.
B. His mother died when he was twelve years old.
C. His mother died when he began to work.
D. His mother died after 1893.
73. What did Henry begin to do after his mother died?
A. He began to work in a machine shop and to repair watches in the evenings.
B. He began to work in a machine shop in the daytime, and repaired watches in the evenings.
C. He began to repair watches in a workshop in London.
D. He began to work in a machine shop in the evenings.
74. Which sentence is true according to the passage?
A. Henry Ford founded the Ford Motor Company.
B. Henry Ford didn’t wish to make a machine.
C. Henry Ford wished to make an engine.
D. Henry Ford lived a happy life when he was a boy.
75. How much did Henry earn a week?
A. Two dollars and fifty cents. B. Three dollars and fifty cents.
C. Two dollars and fifteen cents. D. Four dollars and fifty cents.
Ⅶ. 补全对话（每小题2分，共10分）
从方框中选择句子完成对话，有两句为多余项。
A: Which do you think is the most useful invention?
B: 76
A: Why do you think so?
B: Because it gives people more time to work and play every day. What about you?
A: 77
B: Why is that?
A: You can talk to your friends far away with it. 78
B: I’d like to invent a pen that I can write faster, but as neatly as the usual one. What about you?
A: 79 When I am in the classroom, I can put it in my pocket.
B: That sounds interesting. 80
A: You are quite right. Let’s work hard together.
A. What would you most like to invent?
B. We must work hard if we want to make our dream come true.
C. What about you?
D. I think the most useful invention is the light bulb.
E. I’d like to invent a car.
F. I think the most useful invention is the telephone.
G. I want to buy a car.
Ⅷ. 任务型阅读（每小题2分，共10分）
In 1724, a naked(裸体的), brown creature(生物;动物) with black hair was caught in the forest near a German town. People found out the “creature” was a boy of about twelve. At first, he seemed like a wild(野生的) animal eating raw(生的；未加工的) birds and vegetables. They named the boy Peter. In England, he spent most of his time either lying by the fire or walking through the countryside. Later, scientists learned that Peter left home because his father beat him. He had only been living in the wild for about a year when he was found. However, Peter never learned to talk. He lived the rest of his life in England until he died in 1785.
A boy about 12 years old, who was later named Victor, was found looking for food in the forest in southwestern France in 1799. It was soon found out that Victor was a boy in looks. He ate raw and bad food, and didn’t know the difference between hot and cold. Although a famous French doctor Jean Marc taught him, Victor only learned three words, “milk” and “Oh, God”. He died in 1828 at the age of 40.
阅读短文,根据短文内容完成表格。
Name
Where was he found?
When was he found?
What could he say?
When did he die?
Peter
81. _______
82. _______
He never learned to talk.
In 1785.
Victor
In the woods in southwestern France.
83. _______
84. _______
85. _______
Ⅸ. 书面表达（共10分）
阅读以下表格里的内容, 并根据表格内容写成短文。要求：80词左右。
Inventions
When
Who
Be used for
abacus
in the sixth century
Chinese people
counting
bicycle
1880s
people in England
traveling
potato chips
1853
George Grum
eating
Tea
over three thousand years ago
the Chinese Emperor Shen Nung
drinking
The abacus was invented
同步随堂测试 Unit 10
满分120分，限时100分钟，得分_______
第二部分 英语知识运用
Ⅰ. 根据句意和汉语或首字母提示补全单词（每小题1分，共10分）
21. I _______(睡过头) this morning so that I was late for school.
22. He invited all his _______ (亲戚) to his party.
23. Chairman Mao _______ (宣布) in a proud voice that PRC was formally founded on October 1, 1949.
24. Let’s _______ (揭露) the criminal’s guilty(罪行).
25. I can’t answer the teacher’s questions, so I was very _______ (尴尬的).
26. Last Saturday I was e_______ because I stay up really late.
27. My grandparents live in countryside. They are f_______.
28. He asked his girlfriend to m_______ him, but she refused.
29. I can’t see anything in the bottle. It’s e_______.
30. You must l______ the door before you leave our classroom.
Ⅱ. 单项选择（每小题1分，共15分）
31. I realized that I ______ my homework at home when I got to school.
A. left B. forgot C. had left D. had forgotten
32. —Why are you late for school?
—Because my alarm clock didn’t ______, I got up late.
A. go away B. go off C. went off D. went way
33. The girl has to______a man who she doesn’t love.
A. marry B. married to C. married with D. get married
34. I felt pretty _______ today because I did much farm work yesterday.
A. exhausted B. embarrassing C. thrilling D. thrilled
35. The bad news a panic in that country last week.
A. set up B. took off C. set off D. went off
36.—What happened to you?
—I . By the time I got up, my parents had gone to work.
A. oversleep B. oversleeped C. overslept D. oversleeps
37. By the time I got to the bus stop, the early bus ______ already ______.
A. has; left B. have; left C. had; left D. left
38. Mr. Smith always has _______ to tell us.
A. some good pieces of news B. some pieces of good news
C. some good piece of news D. some piece of good news
39. —Why didn’t you at the school party yesterday？
—Because my mother was ill in hospital.
A. show up B. clean up C. think up D. end up
40. The teacher hopes the students come to school .
A. in time B. by the time C. on time D. on the time
41. —When is ?
—It’s April 1st.
A. April fool’s Day B. April Fool’s Day C. April Fool Day D. April fool day
42. I was late for school because my bike _______ down.
A. break B. was broke C. broken D. broke
43. —_______ you been to Hong Kong before 2007?
—No, I hadn’t.
A. Have B. Did C. Do D. Had
44. —Would you mind my using your pen?
—_______.
A. Yes, please B. Of course not
C. Yes, help yourself D. Sorry, I don’t
45. _______ the time I got up, my brother had already gotten in the showers.
A. At B. By C. For D. To
Ⅲ. 句型转换(每小题2分，共10分)
46. The train had left when Jim got to the station. (改为一般疑问句)
_______ the train _______ when Jim got to the station?
47. His sister had already read some books before she went to school. (改为否定句)
His sister _______ _______ _______ books _______ before she went to the school.
48. By the time she got up, her mother had gone to work. (对划线部分提问)
_______ ______ her mother_______ by the time she got up?
49. He was late for school because his alarm clock didn’t go off. (对划线部分提问)
_______ _____ he late for school?
50. I had left my keys at school when I got home. (对划线部分提问)
_______ ______ you _______ your keys at school?
Ⅳ. 根据短文内容用所给动词的适当形式填空，必要时用助动词（每小题1分，共10分）
Dear Sue,
I 51 (have) a terrible day. By the time I went to bed last night, I 52 (study) three hours for a big English test. When I finally 53 (get) to sleep, I had learned 100 new words. I was so tired! Then I got up late this morning because I 54 (oversleep) . When I ran to school, the bell 55 (ring). Then I 56 (realize) that my backpack was still at home.
I told my teacher I was sorry for 57 (be) late. She told me not to worry. Before I arrived, the class 58 (not do) much work anyway. I was exhausted, but after that I started 59 (relax). By the time we started the test, I 60 (become) a lot calmer.
In the end, I did very well.
Please write soon and tell me what you are doing.
Love,
Sarah
Ⅴ. 完形填空（每小题1分，共10分）
Elizabeth was visiting a big new school. As she walked 61 the doors, she could hear shouts coming from a classroom down the passage. During the 62 , Elizabeth stood on the playground and 63 the children. The 64 ones were playing. The older 65 stood in groups, talking. In one corner, she saw a young 66 with a crowd of twelve years old around her. They were jumping 67 and shouting,
“Please, Miss! ” “What was all that 68 ？” Elizabeth asked the teacher after the children
69 . “They want me to take them to the building which is being pulled 70 in Bell Street. They want to see the rats(老鼠) 71 ！” “Dear! Why? ” “They’re doing a project(项目) on the neighbourhood this term. All their lessons are 72 on this project—English, history and so on. They even do sums(统计) in their 73 lessons about the number of cars 74 in the car factory. I’m their biology teacher and we’re studying rats at the moment. ” “Will you take them to see the rats？” “Oh, yes. Rats are a 75 subject(东西) for a lesson. ”
61. A. over B. through C. from D. in
62. A. break B. class C. meeting D. school
63. A. listened to B. watched C. looked after D. looked for
64. A. younger B. smaller C. bigger D. older
65. A. those B. these C. ones D. one
66. A. student B. teacher C. headmaster D. man
67. A. more or less B. up and down C. neck and neck D. farther and farther
68. A. in B. at C. over D. about
69. A. leave B. has left C. leaves D.left
70. A. over B. down C. in D. out
71. A. here B. there C. near here D. over here
72. A. centered B. played C. held D. paid
73. A. English B. maths C. history D. P.E.
74. A. driven B. put C. made D. bought
75. A. wonderful B. terrible C. bad D. beautiful
Ⅵ. 阅读理解（每小题2分，共20分）
A
Paul got on the bus to go to the town. It was very crowded, and he had to stand for about five minutes. Then some of the passengers got off. Paul sat down next to a fat lady. She had several shopping bags, and Paul didn’t have much room on the seat. At last the bus got to the town.
All the passengers started to get off. Paul was very polite, so he stood up to let the fat lady get off before him. She said, “Thank you. ” Then she tried to get out of the seat with all her bags. But she couldn’t move. She was stuck!
Paul had to push the lady. The conductor pulled her. Finally they got her free but she wasn’t pleased.
“I’ll write to the bus company, ” she said. “I’ll tell them not to make buses with such small seats. ”
76. Why couldn’t the lady get out of the seat?
A. Because the seat on the bus were too small.
B. Because the lady was too fat and had a lot of bags.
C. Because the bus was very crowded.
D. Because Paul was in his seat next to hers.
77. When did Paul get a seat on the bus?
A. As soon as he got on the bus.
B. After five minutes.
C. Just before he wanted to get off.
D. Just before the bus got to the town.
78. How do you know that Paul was very polite?
A. He didn’t take the seat and was always standing.
B. He pushed the lady out of her seat.
C. He stood up to let the lady get off before him.
D. He helped the lady carry her bags.
79. The underlined word “room” in Paragraph 1 means ____.
A. part of a house B. space
C. part of a seat D. something for sitting on
80. “She was stuck! ” in Paragraph 1 means she ____.
A. wasn’t able to move or to get out
B. was sitting there, she couldn’t stand up
C. pushed her bags
D. moved very slowly
B
Some time ago I discovered that one of my chairs had a broken leg. I didn’t think there would be any difficulty in getting it mended, as there are a whole lot of antique(古董) shops near my home. So I left home one morning carrying the chair with me. I went into the first shop expecting a friendly reception(接待). I was quite wrong. The man wouldn’t even look at my chair.
The second shop was just the same, and the third and the fourth—so I decided that my approach must be wrong.
I entered the fifth shop with a plan in my mind. I placed the chair on the floor and said to the shopkeeper, “Would you like to buy a chair? ” He looked it over carefully and said, “Yes, not a bad chair. How much do you want for it, sir? ” “Twenty pounds, ”I said. “OK, ”he said. “I’ll give you twenty pounds. ” “It’s got a slightly broken leg, ” I said. “Yes, I saw that, it’s nothing. ”
Everything was going according to plan and I was getting excited. “What will you do with it? ” I asked. “Oh, it will be easy to sell once the repair is done. ” “I’ll buy it, ” I said. “What do you mean? ” “You’ve just sold it to me, ” he said. “Yes, I know but I’ve changed my mind. I am sorry. I’ll give you twenty seven pounds for it. ” “You must be
crazy, ” he said. Then, suddenly the penny dropped. “I know what you want. You want me to repair your chair. ” “You’re right, ” I said. “And what would you have done if I had walked in and said, ‘Would you mend this chair for me? ’ ” “I wouldn’t have agreed to do it, ”he said. “We don’t do repairs, not enough money in it and too much trouble. But I’ll mend this for you, shall we say for a fiver? ” He was a very nice man and was greatly amused(感到有趣) by the whole thing.
81. We can learn from the text that in the first shop the writer_______.
A. was rather impolite
B. was warmly received
C. asked the shopkeeper to buy his chair
D. asked the shopkeeper to repair his chair
82. The underlined word “approach” in Paragraph 2 means _______.
A. plan for dealing with things B. decision to sell things
C. idea of repairing things D. way of doing things
83. The expression “the penny dropped” in the last paragraph means the shopkeeper _______.
A. changed his mind B. accepted the offer
C. saw the writer’s purpose D. decided to help the writer
84. How much did the writer pay?
A. ￡5. B. ￡7. C. ￡20. D. ￡27.
85. From the text, we can learn that the writer was _______.
A. honest B. careful C. smart D. funny
Ⅶ. 任务型阅读（每小题2分，共10分）
Traffic safety is one of the most important problems in today’s world. Since 1896, more than 35,000,000 people have died in traffic accidents. In 2002, 1,200,000 people died and 50,000,000 were injured（受伤的）in traffic accidents all over the world. Traffic accidents do harm to people.
In China, 109,000 people died in traffic accidents in 2002, and nearly 99,000 died in 2005. In the last 40 years, some rich countries like the USA, Japan and those in West
Europe did some things to improve traffic safety. They also had more doctors and fast cars to help people when traffic accidents happened. Now, 70% of the world’s cars are in these countries, but people die in traffic accidents 15% less there than in other countries. In 2005, for every 10,000 cars on the road in China, 7.6 of the drivers died in traffic accidents. In the U.S. the same number of cars had only 1.7 of the drivers died and in Germany, the number was 1.37.
It’s time for us to do something for the problem. The easiest thing for all of us is to follow the traffic rules!
Traffic Safety Problems
The number of people died in traffic accidents
In 2002
In China
86. _______
In the world
87. _______
In 2005
In China
88. _______
The number of died drivers every 10,000 cars on the road in Germany
89. _______
What all of us should do
90. _______
Ⅷ. 书面表达（共10分）
上星期天你班同学（50人）在李老师的带领下，去敬老院（nursing home）看望老人。同学们分头活动，为老人们做了很多事情，最后大家一起唱歌跳舞，度过了愉快的一天。
要求：1. 不能出现任何学校名称和姓名。
2. 所有的信息必须用上，可以适当发挥。
3. 条理清楚，语意连贯，句式规范，字迹工整。
4. 字数：80词左右。
Unit 1
第一部分 听力
1. A 2. B 3. B 4. C 5. A 6. B 7. A 8. B 9. A 10. B
11. A 12. B 13. B 14. A 15. B 16. B 17. C 18. B 19. B 20. A
听力原文
Ⅰ. 根据你所听到的句子，从A、B、C中选出适当的答语。每个句子读一遍。
1. What a nice meal! Thank you.
2. What do you think of English movies?
3. Have you ever studied with a group?
4. What is difficult for you when studying English?
5. How do you study for a test?
Ⅱ. 听下面的五段对话，每段对话后有一个问题，请根据所提的问题选择正确的图画。每段对话和问题读两遍。
6. W: Can I help you?
M: I’d like to borrow a book please.
W: What book are you going to borrow?
M: Red Star Over China.
W: Here you are.
M: Thanks.
Q: Where are they talking?
7. M: Do you have a watch, Jane?
W: Oh, yes. My watch says it’s 3:20.
Q: What is the time now?
8. M: How do you study English, by listening to the radio or watching TV?
W: I often study English on my computer.
Q: How does she study English?
9. W: What did you do this morning?
M: I helped Grandma Li sweep the snow outside.
Q: What did the man do this morning?
10. W: I visited many places on a bike when I was in Beijing.
M: It’s really exciting to visit Beijing by bike.
Q: How did the woman visit many places in Beijing?
Ⅲ. 根据你所听到的对话，从每小题的A、B、C中选出正确答案回答问题。对话读两遍。
M: Hi, I met Mr Hu the other day on my way to school.
W: Really? How is he? Is he still in No. 5 Middle School?
M: Yes, but now he is the headmaster. We talked a lot about school rules.
W: What does he think of the school rules?
M: He said that he didn’t like the uniform.
W: Yeah! I agree with him. The students should be allowed to wear their own clothes. They would feel more comfortable, and that is good for studying. What else did he say?
M: He said that the vacations should be longer. And I think so, too.
W: They’re too short at present. If they’re longer, the students could have much time to be volunteers.
M: Great! I hope that day will come soon.
Ⅳ. 听短文，选择正确的答案。短文读两遍。
Are you a TV lover? Can you think of your life without TV?Many people think if you turn off your TV, your life will be colorful. They also suggest children should watch less TV. TV will bring children big problems. First, it’s bad for your studies. You spend too much time on TV, so you can’t do well in school. Second, it’s bad for your health. Because you watch too much TV, you’re getting overweight. And your eyesight is also getting worse. Third, it’s bad for your family life. While your family are watching TV, they don’t talk too much. Also it causes too much fighting. Some children like to copy the fighting on television in real life.If you turn off your TV for a week, maybe you can find something fun to do. Maybe you can read books, learn to swim or paint pictures.
What do you think? Would you want to have a try?
第二部分 英语知识运用
Ⅰ. 21. friendship 22. realized 23. challenge 24. soldier 25. deal 26. slowly
27. pronounce 28. aloud 29. mistakes 30. terms
Ⅱ.
31. C 题意：“他是怎样为英语考试做准备的？”“他通过列词汇表学习。”with意为“和、带着”；to意为“向,往,到”；from意为“从……起；从……来;出自”都不符合句意，而for意为“为,为了”表目的。
32. A 题意：成功人士做不同的事情，他们做事情的方式也不同。different是形容词，意为“不同的，有区别的”，可作定语和表；differently是副词，意为“不同地，有区别地”；第一空后是名词，须用形容词different来修饰；第二空须用副词differently来修饰动词do。选项A符合，其他选项与题意不符。
33. D 题意：背诵流行歌曲的单词对英语的学习也有点帮助。memorize 为动词，意为“记忆；背诵”。在四个选项中只有动名词可作主语，故选D。
34. C 题意：“我的英语口语很差。我该怎么办呢？”“很容易，尽可能多练习说”。practice后面接动词时要用动词-ing形式，可知正确答案为C。
35. C 题意：如果你不知道如何拼写一个生词，你应当查词典。look up为动词加副词构成的短语，代词作宾语要放在动词和副词之间，故排除A、B， it代替单数名词，而them代替复数，从句中的a new word为单数名词，故选C。
36. A 题意：随着时间的流逝，我们相互了解得更深了。根据主句的时态决定了从句应用现在时，排除B、C、D；go by和pass by都意为“经过;过去”，都指时间等的流逝。
37. A 题意：“你如何学汉语的？”“我通过读报纸和杂志学习”。across“横越,穿过”，from“从;由”， with“与……一起, 带着”，都不符合句意。by“靠,用,通过”符合句意。故选A。
38. C 题意：我们的英语老师告诉我们一些学英语的方法。of为介词，后面接动词时，动词要用-ing形式，故排除A、B；选项D不符合句意，故选C。
39. A 题意：尽管是星期天，我有许多问题要解决。answer “回答”，不可以与with 搭配，solve “解决；解答”，也不与with搭配，solution 为名词，“解决；解答”，不合题意。deal与with搭配,意为“处理，解决”，符合句意，故选A。
40. A 题意：当我说英语的时候，那里的人总是嘲笑我。get on with “与……相处”，hate “讨厌”，dislike “不喜欢”；都不符合句意。laugh at “嘲笑”，符合句意，故选A。
41. D 题意：当我们在阅览室的时候记住不要大声说话。fast意为“牢固地，很快地”；slowly意为“慢慢地”；politely意为“客气地，优雅地”;loudly意为“大声地”；根据题意选D。
42. A 题意：“你是怎样学习英语的？”“通过听磁带。”how意为“怎样”, where意为“哪里”, when意为“什么时候”, why意为“为什么”，根据答语知how符合句意，故选A。
43. C 题意：除非你努力学习，否则你将不会通过考试。when疑问副词，“什么时候,何时”；if 连词，“如果；假如,要是”；after“在……以后”，都不符合句意，unless意为“如果不,除非”，符合句意，故选C。
44. C 题意：“对不起我迟到了。”“没关系，但下次不要迟到了。”All right.为“好吧”；You’re welcome.为“不客气”；That’s right.为“正确”；It doesn’t matter.为“没关系”，故选C。
45. B 题意：我们把我们的英语老师看做我们的妈妈，因为她对我们很好。regard 意为“将……视为”，与as搭配，其他搭配不当。故选B。
Ⅲ. 46. learners 47. pronunciation 48. solution 49. differently 50. spoken
Ⅳ. 51. the best way to
52. doesn’t matter, don’t understand
53. afraid to speak, laugh at
54. improve，spoken，by practicing
55. take notes
Ⅴ.
56. B 从上下文可知，是指学习的“时间”，而不是指“天”、“小时”或“周”。
57. A 根据上下文意思可知“学习时间长并没有多大帮助”。
58. D return意思为“回,返回”，一般与介词to连用。
59. B 上文中的“learn more”和下文中的“study better”是并列关系，所以用and。
60. A 心理学家通过实验“已经发现学习就是以这种方式发生”。
61. C 这里是以“英语学习作为例子”，take sth. as an example “以……作例子。”
62. D 根据上文“起初学习会取得巨大进步，你就会感到高兴”和下文“你就认为你学不到东西了”，所以判断“你的语言学习似乎停留下来”。
63. C 从上文可判断，“你学不到任何的东西，你就会放弃”。
64. B “在某一点上，语言学习将会达到另一个跳跃”。
65. C 由“If you get enough sleep, food, rest and exercise, studying English can be very effective...”可知只有选项C才与上下文一致。
Ⅵ.
A
66. C 细节理解题。由文章第一段第二句“One of the best ways of practicing your English is to speak to foreigners.”可知C为正确选项。
67 C 细节理解题。由文章中第二段第三句“But if not, you should probably let him or her get on with the business.”可知“当外国人正忙的时候，让他停下来与你说话是不礼貌的”，选C。
68. D 推理判断题。由文章中第三段第二句可推出“他可能感到很高兴” 。
69. A 主旨大意题。由全文可知：本文主要是谈论在课外学语言的方法，即与外国人交谈。70. C 主旨归纳题。全文主要谈论的是什么时候与外国人交谈学英语。选项C与全文内容相符。本文谈论是“课外”，而不是“课内”，故不选A；本文并没就“为什么学习英语”进行说明，故也不选B；选项D题目太宽，也不能选。
71. A 细节理解题。由文中第一段第一句“When you are learning English, you find it not clever to put an English sentence, word for word, into your own language.”很明确地知道选项A与短文内容相符。
72. C 细节理解题。由文中第二段第二句“It’s important to master(掌握) the rules for word order in the study of English, too.”可知答案C正确。
73. C 推理判断题。由文章第二段中第四句可推出“有时单词的顺序变了，但意思不会发生变化”，与选项C相符，选项A、B、D说法太绝对，故不选。
74. B 细节理解题。由文章第二段最后“Let’s see the difference between the two pairs of sentences.”可知接下来两句话由于单词顺序不同意义不同。
75. D 主旨归纳题。根据文章主要内容是介绍“学英语注意的事项”。选项D与文章主要内容相符，选项A、C只是文章内容的一个方面，而选项B本文根本没提及。
Ⅶ. 76. C 77. E 78. B 79. G 80. A
Ⅷ. 81. listening, speaking
82. make mistakes
83. notes, letters
84. something interesting/easy
85. not look
Ⅸ.
Mr. Pierre，
These days I feel English is difficult for me because I have some problems in learning English. I can’t understand the teacher in class. And I always make mistakes in grammar. Also I can’t remember some of the words. And I can’t get pronunciation right. I feel so sad. Would you please tell me how I should learn English? What should I do now? I need your help. Please write back soon.
Yours
Xu Zheng
Unit 2
第一部分 听力
1. A 2. B 3. C 4. C 5. C 6. A 7. C 8. B 9. A 10. C
11. B 12. A 13. B 14. C 15. A 16. T 17. F 18. F 19. T 20. F
听力原文
Ⅰ. 根据听到的句子，选出合适的答语。每个句子读一遍。
1. Excuse me. Could you tell me how to get to the airport?
2. Would you like some more fish?
3. Excuse me, where is the school library?
4. I hope to go out with you, but I don’t have a bike.
5. Would you like to go swimming this afternoon?
Ⅱ. 听下面的五段对话，每段对话后有一个问题，请根据所提的问题选择正确的图画。每段对话和问题读两遍。
6. M: Hi, Celia, I can’t find my dictionary. Have you seen it anywhere?
W: Sorry, I haven’t. Perhaps my cousin has seen it.
Q: What has the man lost?
7. W: Did you go shopping on Sunday?
M: Yes, the socks cost so little that we bought several pairs.
Q: What did the man buy on Sunday?
8. W: What’s the matter with the boy?
M: He’s ill. He is getting an injection.
Q: What are they talking about?
9. W: Jack, would you like to join us at the beach in Qingdao?
M: Great! I love swimming in the sea.
W: We’ll see you when we arrive there.
Q: Where are they going for a vacation?
10. W: Can I help you?
M: I’d like to have two tickets to Mount Tai, please.
W: OK.
Q: Where will he go for his vacation?
Ⅲ. 听下面一段对话，根据对话内容选择最佳答案。对话读两遍。
M: Hello, Doctor Cathy.
W: Hello, it’s you again, Tom. What’s wrong with you this time? Anything I can do for you?
M: Oh, yes. Doctor, I need some medicine. You see, I often feel tired and don’t feel like doing anything.
W: Let me look you over. I think nothing is wrong with you, Tom. Your problem is that you eat too much. I told you to exercise every day and eat less food. Did you do these things?
M: Well, you see, doctor, I always get up late in the morning. I have no time to do morning exercises.
W: Why don’t you exercise in the afternoon? At least one hour a day?
M: Well, I... I have to do some reading and...
W: Then what about the evening?
M: But doctor, I love to watch TV in the evening...
Ⅳ. 听短文，判断正（T）误（F）。短文读两遍。
Many people do not like to stay at home on holidays. They want to go out to see something different or do something interesting. So people from the country come to the city and people from the city go to the country for holidays. During the holidays, trains, buses and planes are all very busy. It is very hard to buy train tickets or air tickets. Many people take cars or buses for traveling.
Last May Day my family went to the country by car for our holiday. There was too much traffic on the road, so we had to move very slowly. It took us about an hour to get out of the town. After some time, we came to a hill. It was green and beautiful. We thought this was a good place for a picnic, so we stopped and took the food, fruit and drinks out of the car. We sat down and began to eat, suddenly a strong wind blew and soon it started to rain. We had to run back to our car and have our picnic in the car. Then we drove back home. What a sad holiday!
第二部分 英语知识运用
Ⅰ. 21. airplane 22. caused 23. exactly 24. decision 25. comics
26. attention 27. chew 28. chat 29. patient 30. candy
Ⅱ. 31. C 题意：他过去常常放学后上网冲浪，但现在他不喜欢去了。used to为固定词组，意为“过去常常”，符合句意，故选A；而没有选项A、B、D的搭配形式。
32. A 题意：玛丽害怕夜晚出去，因为她非常害怕黑暗。be terrified of 意思为“对……感到害怕”；be interested in意思为“对……感兴趣”； be worried about意思为“对……担心”； be angry with意思为“对……生气”，故选项A符合句意，其他选项不符。
33. B 题意：许多姑娘非常害怕单独在夜间行走，但我姐姐不怕。be terrified of “害怕……，恐惧……”，这里of为介词，后跟动名词，故选B。
34. A 题意： “我不知道如何学好英语？”“我觉得你应当注意你的拼写”。pay attention to注意，留意； listen to听； worry about 担心；pay for为……付款。选项A符合句意，而其他选项不符。
35. C 题意：即使我们非常聪明，但我们仍需要努力学习。if 如果，假设；unless除非，如果不；since自从，因为；even though 即使，选项C符合句意。
36. B 题意：她的母亲承担不起孩子的教育因为她的家庭非常贫穷。want想要； try
试图，尽力； offer提供，供应，都不符合句意。而afford意为“负担得起”，符合句意。
37. B 题意：我的弟弟喜欢亮着灯睡觉。这里with介词，意为“随着”，和后面的名词构成介词短语，在句中用做状语，表示伴随情况。on是形容词，意为“开着的；工作着的”。 根据句意选项B符合。
38. C 题意：“吉姆，你在课堂上听老师讲课有困难吗？”“有，特别在语文课上。”have some trouble (in) doing sth. 意为“做某事有困难”，故选C。
39. B 题意：当他年轻的时候，他对科学就产生了兴趣。interesting是形容词，有主动意味，意为“有趣的”，作表语时，主语通常是物；作定语时，既可修饰人，也可修饰物。interested是形容词，有被动意味，意为“对……感兴趣的”，主语通常是人，且多用于be ／get ／feel ／become interested in结构中。故选项B符合题意。
40. A 题意：Mario过去常常放学后练习弹钢琴。考查used to 和practice的用法。used to 后跟动词原形；practice 后跟动名词，选项A符合题意。
41. A 题意：我过去常常花费两个小时做作业，但现在仅用一个小时。spend +时间+(in) doing sth. 做某事花费多少时间。
42. B 题意：请不要放弃尝试，最终你会成功的。give up doing sth.放弃做某事。选项B符合要求，其他选项不符。
43. C 题意：“他们最后解决问题了吗？” “是的，他们解决了。”at the end of 在……末； by the end of 到……末为止；in the end最后，终于，选项C符合句意。
44. B 题意：托尼似乎变化很大。It seems that 后跟从句，从句用了现在完成时态，主句不能用一般过去时态。
45. B 题意：“你过去在一家汽车厂工作吗？”“不，我过去在一家电脑公司工作”。used to 的一般疑问句可用Did sb. use to...?或used sb. to ...?
Ⅲ. 46. himself 47. terrified 48. death 49. surprise 50. decision
Ⅳ. 51. didn’t use 52. didn’t he 53. used to walk 54. What, to do 55. How long did
Ⅴ. 56. be terrified of 57. goes to sleep 58. To my surprise 59. given up 60. takes, pride in
Ⅵ.
61. D 由前面的“In summer I used to be free from school”，可知“没有特别的事情去做”。
62. B 根据句子意思是“在一个地方休息几周”，stay at 意为“呆在某地”，符合句意，care
about意为“关心，在意”，wait for意为“等候”， deal with意为“处理；对付”，都不符合句意。
63. C 根据上下句的意思“我们上午很早出发，离开主路旁的村庄，去另一小村庄。”故选C。
64. A 根据上句“天气很热”，所以本句“路似乎很长”，故选A。
65. B 根据上句“我的一个朋友说他知道一条近路”，所以“我们想缩短距离”。waste 意为“浪费”，afford意为“买得起”， take意为“带去;带领”。cut the distance“缩减路程”符合句意。
66. A 根据上文“The sun was too hot”和下句“我们走在阴凉处，听着鸟儿在歌唱”，作者的心情肯定很好。
67. D “我们穿过一片灌木丛”。根据常识可选D。
68. C 根据“各种各样的东西在草丛中到处都是”。on 在……上面，down往……下方，在……下方，by 在……旁边。around“四处，到处”，故选C。
69. A 根据上句“这个被遗弃的地方如此孤寂以致于我们想快点从那里离开”。
70. B 根据上句“我们想快点从那里离开”，故选B。
Ⅶ.
71. D 细节理解题。由第一段可知女儿要父亲帮她做数学作业。
72. B 细节理解题。根据第四段可知B项是错误的。
73. A 细节理解题。根据第七段， 那位老师所说的“个位上的数字是几就表示几个1”，当然应是小于0的数。
74. D 推理判断题。由最后一段“My head was now hurting.”这句话，可知“父亲”听了老师的解释后没有生气、焦虑或悲伤，而是头昏脑胀，疲惫之至。
75. C 推理判断题。由“父亲”的举动，就可以想像他以后不会再做女儿的数学题了。
76. T 77. F 78. F 79. F 80. F
Ⅷ. 81. B 82. A 83. C 84. F 85. D
Ⅸ.
Dear Kitty,
I have two friends, one is David, the other is Yu Mei. David is tall and generous,while he used to be short and outgoing. He used to play basketball, but now he likes football
better. In his free time he usually plays football with his friends.
Yu Mei is a nice Chinese girl. She used to have black straight hair, but now she has blonde curly hair. She used to wear glasses. Instead, she wears contact lenses now. She told me they are more convenient.
My friends have changed a lot. Do you think so?
Lin Tao
Unit 3
第一部分 听力
1. C 2. C 3. B 4. C 5. B 6. C 7. A 8. A 9. C 10. C 11. C 12. C 13. C 14. B 15. C 16. eight 17. dictionary 18. brother 19. basketball 20. last
听力原文
Ⅰ. 根据你所听到的句子，选出与句子内容相符的图片。每个句子读一遍。
1. Millie wants to fly to Japan with her parents tomorrow morning.
2. I arrived at school at a quarter to seven.
3. Lucy is eating meals with other people now.
4. He used to get up late. But now he is used to getting up early.
5. She can’t sleep well before an exam.
Ⅱ. 根据你所听到的句子，从A、B、C中选出恰当的答语。每个句子读一遍。
6. Could you tell me where the restroom is?
7. Do you know where I can exchange some money?
8. What was the weather like yesterday?
9. How did you feel when you heard the good news?
10. Have you ever had Beijing Roast Duck?
Ⅲ. 听下面的五段对话，每段对话后有一个问题。从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳答案。每段对话和问题读两遍。
11. W: Will you stay in England for a long time?
M: Yes. The first two weeks we’ll visit some places of interest. The third week we’ll visit some friends. Then in the last week we’ll be together with my parents and do some
shopping before we return.
Q: How long will they stay in England?
12. W: What do you think of the meal tonight?
M: Great! I will take my friends here next time.
Q: Where do you think these two people are?
13. M: Would you like me to help you with the box, Miss?
W: No, thanks. I can manage it myself.
Q: What’s the relationship between the two speakers?
14. W: How much are the tomatoes?
M: 30 cents a pound.
W: I’ll take two pounds, please.
Q: How much should the woman pay for the tomatoes?
15. M: May I take your order?
W: I’d like a hamburger, please.
M: Anything to drink?
W: A glass of water, please.
Q: What would the woman like to have?
Ⅳ. 听一段对话，根据其内容和以下所给表格的要求，在横线上填上有关的信息，每空一词。对话读两遍。
M: What are you doing, Kate?
W: I’m writing my report, Dad.
M: What is it about?
W: It’s about the best presents my classmates have ever received. It’s interesting.
M: Really? Would you like to say something about it?
W: Of course. Do you know Sally, my best friend?
M: Yes, she is a nice girl.
W: Yeah. The best present she has ever received is a piano. Her father gave it to her on her 8th birthday.
M: That’s an expensive present. What about Emma?
W: Oh, Emma’s brother gave her a dictionary on New Year’s Day. She likes it best, for it is really useful.
M: How about the boys?
W: My neighbor Bill got a basketball from his uncle. He thought it was the best present.
M: When did he get it?
W: Last month, when his uncle came back from America.
M: Your report is really good. I’m sure your teacher will like it.
W: Thank you.
第二部分 英语知识运用
Ⅰ. 21. earrings 22. license 23. volunteers 24. silly 25. achieve 26. reply
27. present 28. experience 29. succeeded 30. teenagers
Ⅱ. 31. A 题意：青少年不允许去网吧。allow sb. to do sth. 允许某人去做某事，含有情态动词should的被动语态应为：should be+过去分词。选项A符合，其他选项不符。
32. C 题意：允许中学生在校使用电脑吗？被动语态的结构：be +动词的过去分词。选项C符合被动语态的结构，故选C。
33. B 题意：如果讲课乏味的话，许多学生将困倦。sleep 动词，“睡觉”； slept是sleep的过去分词；而sleepy 和asleep均为形容词，sleepy意为“困倦的；不活跃的”，强调是“困倦”的意思；asleep意为“睡着”，强调的是“熟睡”， 故选项B符合句意，其他选项不正确。
34. C 题意：在上学期间的晚上，我必须呆在家里。in用在年、月前；at 用在时刻前；for 后跟时间段，而on用在某一天或具体的某天上午、下午、晚上前，选项C符合题意。
35. C 题意：如果你不能入睡，就起床试着做一些事情，而不要躺在床上。instead of doing意思是“代替做……”，其中of后面的内容是被否定的。分析比较四个选项，由题意可选出正确答案为C。
36. D 题意：“昨天我去农场帮忙植树了。”“我也如此。”So+助动词/be动词/情态动词+主语，表示“主语也如此”，这里的助动词/be动词/情态动词随主语的人称和数而变化，时态也要与上句一致。根据上句用了一般过去时态，这里也要用一般过去时态，故选项D符合题意。
37. C 题意：这位老师对学生非常严厉。形容词strict是“严格的”，“严厉的”的意思，对人严格时用介词with，对工作等严格时用介词in。空后his students是人，故选C。
38. B
题意：“顺便问一声，你什么时候请人理的发？”“上周。”get+名词/代词+动词的过去分词的结构，表示“使……被做”，“请人做……”。选项B为正确答案。
39. A 题意：对不起，我必须不迟于10点到家。by 不迟于；on用在星期或某一天前；after 在……之后；until直到……时，到……为止。选项A符合句意。
40. A 题意：“我认为青少年不允许抽烟。”“我同意你的说法。”agree with表示“同意”，后面接表示人的名词或代词，也可以接表示“意见，看法”的名词。agree on表示“（两人以上）就……取得一致意见，在……方面意见一致”，其主语多为复数形式，宾语是表示事、计划等的名词，而不是表示人的名词或代词。agree to表示“同意”，后面接表示“计划，建议，安排”等的名词，接动词原形时构成动词不定式结构。故选项A为正确答案。
41. B 题意：“你认为谁正确？”“似乎他正确。”It seem that +从句，意为“看起来似乎/好像……”。故选B。
42. B 题意：我认为青少年不应开车，因为他们不够认真。enough修饰形容词要后置；选项C、D不符合句意，故选项B为正确答案。
43. C 题意：“他说你坏话了。”“我不在乎他说什么。”take care of 和look after照顾；照看；think about 考虑；care about 关心，在乎。所以选项C 。
44. B 题意：“听说比尔考试又不及格我很难过。”“不要担心他。我相信他不会放弃直到成功。”这里用动词的现在时表将来，故选B。
45. B 题意：必须每天浇花，否则它们会死。根据the flowers“被浇灌”可知要用被动语态， must一定；必须，而can表示“可以”，故选B而不选D。
Ⅲ. 46. sleepy 47. importance 48. pierced 49. successful 50.opportunities
Ⅳ. 51.Should, be 52.can’t be thrown 53. must be finished 54. What should, do
55.can speak
Ⅴ. 56. instead of playing 57. stay up 58. as much as possible 59. get in the way of
60. concentrate more on
Ⅵ.
61. C 根据下文：下面所给出的是两个不同的例子。
62. D 根据文意可知是“当她去上班的时候。”
63. A 若要清扫地毯就要把它弄到外面去，这是一般的常识。
64. B in good order是一个固定短语。
65. B 孩子们在做完扫除之后才把花摆在桌子上的。
66. B 这里应用第三人称复数指Mrs Frowzier 家的孩子们。
67. C 由上下文可知他们家的地毯应该是很脏的。
68. D 根据下句可知房间里的垃圾是越来越多。
69. A 全文的动作都使用的一般过去时态。
70. C 两个家庭的孩子们由于在母亲不在家时的行为的不同，一个好，一个不好。所以肯定只有一家的母亲会感到高兴。
Ⅶ.
71. F 72. T 73. F 74. F 75. F
76. D 主旨大意题。全文就学生做哪些事情是正确的或错误的进行了论述。选项D与主旨相符合，故选D。
77. C 推理判断题。由文章第六段可判断选项A正确；由文章第二段可判断选项B正确；由文章第七段可判断选项D正确；选项C在本文中没有涉及，故不正确。
78. B 主旨大意题。由第四段第二句可知本段要表达的意思是“团结合作会使你的团队更强大”。
79. B 细节理解题。由文章最后一段“ You can use the web for fun or homework.”可知正确答案为B。
80. A 主旨大意题。由第一段第二句“Middle School is going to use a new way to decide who the top students are.”可知选项A为最佳答案。
Ⅷ.
81. Schools can be kept in good order with uniforms.
82. Wearing uniforms can help students develop simple life habits.
83. Wearing school uniforms will deprive students of individuality.
84. Attending sports games seems to be more effective for collective spirit instead of wearing uniforms.
85. Wearing school uniforms doesn’t result in simple life habit.
Ⅸ.
Every school has its own rules for students. We are told to wear school uniforms at school. We should listen to our teachers carefully in class. Homework must be done
carefully and handed in on time.We should keep quiet in the library.Getting along well with our classmates is necessary.
Besides, we must always be on time for school.
I think it’s important for us to follow the school rules. But we don’t like to wear our school uniforms all the time. Each of us is not the same and we like to be different from each other.
Unit 4
第一部分 听力
1. B 2. C 3. C 4. A 5. B 6. B 7. C 8. C 9. C 10. C 11. A 12. C 13. A 14. C 15. C 16. TV 17. 2 800 dollars 18. Watching programs
19. Japan 20. 2 400 dollars
听力原文
Ⅰ. 根据你所听到的句子，从A、B、C中选择一个正确的图片。每个句子读一遍。
1. I went to the shopping mall and bought a camera made in China.
2. Is it your turn to wash the dishes?
3. Pandas only live in China. They like eating bamboo.
4. I used to walk to school. Now I take a bus to school.
5. My favorite musical group is S.H.E.
Ⅱ. 听下面的五段对话，每段对话后有一个问题。从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳答案。每段对话和问题读两遍。
6. M: Lucy, are you a pop music fun?
W: No, I like classical music best.
Q: What is Lucy’s favorite kind of music?
7. W: Tony, did you have fun in the Culture Palace last week?
M: Yes, I did.
Q: Tony didn’t have fun in the Culture Palace, did he?
8. W: Excuse me, which is the way to the bookstore?
M: Walk along this road until you reach the end. You’ll find the bookstore in front of you.
Q：Where is the bookstore?
9. M: What’s the time, Mum? Our class meeting starts at nine o’clock.
W: Oh, you must hurry then. You have only a quarter left.
M: No time for breakfast today. Goodbye, Mum.
W: Have a good day, dear.
Q: What time is it now?
10. M: Be careful! There is much traffic.
W: But I must get to the office as soon as possible.
M: I’m afraid you mustn’t cross the road from here. It’s dangerous.
Q: Why can’t the woman cross the road from here?
Ⅲ. 听对话，根据所听内容选择正确的答案。对话读两遍。
M: Hello, Li Mei.
W: Hello, Wu Bing. Do you like animals?
M: Yes. I like bears best. They like to jump and run. What about you?
W: The elephant is my favorite animal. It is strong.
M: Oh, let’s go to the zoo tomorrow. I hear there’s a dolphin show there.
W: Good idea. When shall we meet?
M: What about ten to nine?
W: Why not meet a little earlier? Let’s make it half past eight.
M: Good! No problem.
W: Where shall we meet then?
M: Let’s meet at the gate of the zoo.
W: All right. See you then.
M: See you.
Ⅳ. 听短文，根据短文内容完成表格，每空不多于三个单词。短文读两遍。
I’ve got a new TV and a new camera. The TV is made in China, but the camera is made in Japan. I spent 2 800 dollars on the TV and the camera cost me 2 400 dollars. I watch many kinds of programs on TV after dinner every day and I like sports programs best. It gives me a lot of fun. I’m planning to go to Beijing this summer holiday. There
are many places of interest there. I will take many beautiful pictures with my new camera there.
第二部分 英语知识运用
Ⅰ. 21. downstairs 22. introduce 23. deep 24. fairly 25. worries 26. offer 27. research
28. million 29. permission 30. plenty
Ⅱ.
31. C 题意：“在考试前，我总是感到紧张。我该怎么办呢？”“如果我是你，我将在睡觉前长时间散步。”if引导的虚拟条件句，从句用一般过去时态，而主句用过去将来时态。选项C符合题意。
32. C 题意：广州这个时节有很多雨水。plenty of “大量的，充裕的”，用来修饰可数名词和不可数名词，用法同a lot of / lots of。这里rain为不可数名词，many和 few只修饰可数名词。故选C。
33. C 题意：“这么多困难。” “是的，如果李平在的话，就会好了。”if引导的虚拟条件句,当从句的谓语动词是be动词时，无论主语是第几人称，一定要用were, 而不用was。
34. A 题意：当这小姑娘遇见陌生人时，她经常很紧张。nervous紧张不安的；sad悲哀的；terrible可怕的,吓人的；careful仔细的，小心的。根据句意选A。
35. C 题意：今年全世界数百万人来北京看2008年奥运会。million前有确切的数字时，million用单数，且不与of连用；million前无确切数字，million用复数，且与of连用，即millions of，所以选C。
36. C 题意：今天早晨，他起床晚了，没吃早饭就去上学了。考查介词后跟动名词短语的用法。without介词，意为“没有”，后跟（动）名词作宾语。
37. A 题意：他很容易相处，因此他有很多朋友。get along well with 意思为“与……相处得好”； plenty of用来修饰可数名词和不可数名词,用法同a lot of / lots of，故选项符合句意。
38. D 题意：我没有礼物，如果大家都带礼物将会怎么样呢？what if...=what would happen if...，意为“如果……将会怎么样”。根据句意选项D为正确答案。
39. B 题意：这本新书什么时候出版仍然还没决定。come on 赶快；come out 出版，发表；come over过来；come up with提出，想出。选项B符合句意。
40. B 题意：这个糟糕的消息使人们都很失望，他们不得不想另一种解决问题的办法。let down 意为“使……失望或沮丧”。选项B符合句意。
41. C 题意：一些人说他们宁愿买一辆新车，而不愿修理它。would rather do than do意为“宁愿……而不愿。”,would rather后接动词原形，than 也要相应地跟动词原形。故选C。
42. A 题意：我根本不喜欢这种衬衫。not...in the slightest是个固定词组，意思是“一点也不，根本不”。选项A符合句意。
43. B 题意：他是个精力充沛的人。他从来不感到疲劳。creative创造的，创造性的；energetic精力旺盛的，精神饱满的；friendly友好的；shy害羞的。根据下句“他从来不感到疲劳”，故选项B符合句意。
44. A 题意：“如果你有足够的钱，你将给你妈妈买什么样的礼物？”“我还没确定。但我会给她买特别的东西。”special为形容词，修饰不定代词放在其后，肯定句用something,故选A。
45. D 题意：你会赢得这场比赛，我相信你。believe动词，意思为“相信;信任”，后跟从句；be sure of 后不能跟人作宾语；confidence名词，意思为“自信心”；confident 形容词，意思为“自信的；有把握的”，be confident of sb.对某人有信心。故选D。
Ⅲ. 46. millions 47. listener 48. shelves 49. helpful 50. herself 51. medical
52. knowledgeable 53. worried 54. slightest 55. were
Ⅳ. 56. getting along well with 57. came up with 58. would rather buy, than 59.let, down
60. come out
Ⅴ.
61. A 后面这句话是前面内容的原因，从句子的意思上可以看出来。
62. C 孩子们与Ben开玩笑的原因是他的反应较慢。
63. B 由于孩子们的学习不好，他们的母亲才会做出决定自己努力去帮助他们。
64. C 到图书馆肯定是去读书的。
65. A 根据下句“the teacher held up a rock” 可知这是在课堂上。
66. D 根据上句“Ben put up his hand” 可以知道Ben 举手之后，老师是会让他发言的。
67. D 前文已经提到，Ben的反应较慢，所以他从不回答老师的问题的。这次，他举手回答问题，当然同学们会感到怀疑。
68. C 根据下句“he said a lot about it” 可知Ben对rock懂的很多。
69. C 根据所给语境可知是“从哪里找到的”。
70. B 当听完Ben的回答之后，老师和同学们一定很吃惊。
71. D Ben的这些知识都是从他读的书籍的报导中得到的，这是人们在图书馆中获取知识的途径。
72. A 根据下句“When he finished high school, he went to Yale University.”可知Ben已经成为了一名好学生。
73. A Ben长大后知道了他小时候所不了解的关于母亲的事情。
74. B Ben现在懂的是他小时候所不了解的。
75. A 文章整体贯穿的是读书。
Ⅵ.
76. B 细节理解题。由第一段最后一句可知选B，选项A、C、D不符合文章内容。
77. D 词义猜测题。根据contact的宾语和上下文可知，本句的意思“尽量与父母取得联系”。选项A“以……结束”，选项B“等候”，选项C“寻找”，都不符合语境。故选D。
78. C 细节理解题。由第六段可知“失火自救”的方法应选C。
79. A 细节理解题。由第七段可知答案选A，当有人溺水而你不会游泳时，要大声呼救。
80. A 主旨大意题。文章就如何自我保护做了介绍，选项A符合文章大意，选项B、C、D都不符合主题。
81. C 主旨大意题。通读全文，主要介绍了不自信的原因和树立自信的方法。选项C与文章大意相符。
82. B 细节理解题。由第三段可很明显地判断B项不是不自信的原因。
83. C 细节理解题。由文章“1.Break a task into smaller steps. 2.Acknowledge success for each step.3.Enhance overall confidence.”可知有三条建议。
84. D 细节理解题。标题1. 下面的“Before you set out to perform a task or try to achieve a goal, you must realize that the activity is really a series of smaller steps.” 可知正确答案选D。
85. A 主旨大意题。通读全文和标题3可知选项A与文章大意相符。
Ⅶ. 86. C 87. B 88. G 89. F 90. E
Ⅷ.
Dear Li Ming,
I’m glad to hear from you.
I think some of us have the same trouble as you. Perhaps you may do like this:
First, you should keep happy and then you may not get angry with your classmates easily. You should be friendly to greet them when you meet. Take an active part in games with them if you are free. Help your friends when they are in trouble. Don’t laugh at them or play jokes on them when they make mistakes. Don’t trouble them when they’re studying or resting. Of course, it is very necessary to learn to work together in our study.
I’m sure if you are kind, friendly and helpful, you’ll get on well with them.
I hope what I said can help you.
Best wishes.
Yours
Dr All-known
Unit 5
第一部分 听力
1. A 2. B 3. A 4. C 5. A 6. B 7.B 8. B 9. C 10. B 11. C 12. C 13. C 14. C 15. B 16. cool 17. students 18. careful 19. alone
20. No Swimming
听力原文
Ⅰ. 听句子，选择恰当的应答语。每个句子读一遍。
1. How do you like that song?
2. Would you like some butter?
3. What is your favorite sport?
4. What is your favorite drink?
5. What subject do you like better, maths or English?
Ⅱ. 听下面的五段对话，每段对话后有一个问题，请根据所提的问题选择正确的图画。每段对话和问题读两遍。
6. M: Look at the woman. Who is she?
W: Don’t you know her? She’s Liang Yongqi, a famous singer!
Q: Who are they talking about?
7. M: What happened to the boy?
W: He fell down and hurt his arm. He was taken to a hospital by car.
Q: How was the boy taken to the hospital?
8. W: Excuse me, where is the Post Office?
M: It’s over there, next to the Science Museum.
W: Thank you very much.
Q: Which map is right?
9. M: What’s the matter, madam?
W: I have a toothache.
M: Maybe you should see a dentist.
Q: What’s the matter with the woman?
10. W: The radio says it will be sunny today.
M: Oh, never believe the weather reports! Look, it’s raining outside.
Q: What’s the weather like now?
Ⅲ. 听对话，根据对话内容选择正确答案。对话读两遍。
W: Did you see the film on TV last night?
M: The one on Channel 6?
W: No, on Channel 4. It was about a group of scientists who travelled across the desert.
M: No, I didn’t. I went out for a meal with my friends. They took me to a French restaurant.
W: Sounds unusual! What was the food like?
M: Very nice. What food do you like?
W: I don’t like foreign food. I like fish and chips.
M: I notice you always eat chips! Don’t you get fed up with chips?
W: No, never.
M: Well, I prefer trying new food.
Ⅳ. 听短文，填入所缺单词，每空不超过三个单词。短文读两遍。
People like swimming in summer because water can make them feel cool. If you swim in the wrong place, it may not be safe. In recent years, a lot of people died when
they were swimming in the water, and most of them were students. Summer is here again. If you go swimming, don’t forget that many good swimmers have died in the water. They died because they were not careful, not because they could not swim. So don’t go into the water when you are alone. If there is a “No Swimming” sign, don’t go into the water. If you can remember these rules, swimming will be safe.
第二部分 英语知识运用
Ⅰ. 21. author 22. neighbors 23. anxious/worried 24. director 25. appointment
26. belongs 27. picnic 28. finger 29. catch 30. sky
Ⅱ.
31. C 题意：“这是谁的自行车？”“一定是托尼的，他的双肩背包在上面。”to belong to意为“属于”，后面直接跟人，选项A不符合句意；选项B中的belong后面要跟介词to；因must后跟动词原形，故D项不选。C为正确答案。
32. A 题意：这本数学书一定是露西的，看！她的名字在封面上呢。must be 表示肯定的猜测，必须要用在肯定句中，意为“一定是”。
33. C 题意：“你现在感觉好点了吗？”“不要担心我的健康。现在我身体非常好。”此句为祈使句，后跟动词原形，故不选D；worry后跟宾语要加介词about,故A、B不选。这里be worried about表示“为……担心”。
34. B 题意：“吉姆在哪？”“他现在可能在家里睡觉呢”。might be doing属于“情态动词+行为动词的进行式（即情态动词+be+v-ing形式）”结构，表示推测某动作现在正在进行。
35. B 题意：当爸爸进来的时候，我的小弟弟假装在看书。pretend 一般后跟动词不定式作宾语，即pretend to do sth.意为“假装去做某事”。这里指“假装正在做”，故选B。
36. C 题意：我们没有钱了。我们把钱用完了，回不了家了。use up是“消耗，用尽”的意思，后跟代词作宾语，放在动词use和副词up之间，money是不可数名词，由it代替。故选C。
37. A 题意：我认为另一种污染是噪音污染。sound 作“声音”解，含义最广，指可以听到的任何声音；voice 作“声音”解时，多指人发出的声音，包括说话声、歌声和笑声；noise 作“噪音，嘈杂声，吵闹声”讲，特指不悦耳，不和谐的声音。
38. A 题意：口语测试占英语期末考试的20%。use up意为“用光，用完，耗尽”， look up意为“查找，查阅”，turn up意为“把……调大一点”，均不符合句意，而make
up意为“组成，构成”，符合句意，故选A。
39. C 题意：在操场上有些小孩在打篮球。“there be+主语+动词的现在分词”结构中，现在分词短语playing basketball作后置定语。故选C。
40. D 题意：我看见许多苹果从树上掉到地上。根据see sb./sth. doing可知答案选D，drop“落下，掉下”。
41. B 题意：“你听见教室外奇怪的声音了吗？”“不，我没有。”listen和hear都有“听”的意思。listen为不及物动词，后面接介词to，强调的是动作。hear是及物动词，意思是“听见,听到”，强调的是结果。故选B。
42. B 题意：我不喜欢冬天，因为有太多冰雪。too much是形容词词组，用来修饰不可数名词,其中心词是much，副词too修饰much，以加强语气。much too的含义是“（实在）太……”，它常用做副词词组，用来修饰形容词或副词，much用来加强语气，修饰too，表示“太”，“过于”。 too和 very是副词，后跟形容词或副词，故选B。
43. A 题意：在这个小村庄里一定有怪事。复合不定代词被形容词修饰时，形容词应置于不定代词之后。此句是肯定句，故用something。
44. A 题意：“我的笔记本在哪儿？我到处找不到它。”“它可能在你的包里或在这些书里。” must be表示有把握的推测；might be意为“可能是”，表示推测，C、D不符合题意。
45. B 题意：“汤姆，你的爸爸在哪里？”“我没把握。他可能在办公室。” may be用做谓语，意思是“可能”，表示一种可能性或推测。maybe 副词,用做状语,意思是“很可能,大概”，故选B。
Ⅲ. 46. interview 47. owner 48. worried 49. final 50. noisy
Ⅳ. 51. Why was 52. does,belong to 53. be late for 54. What might 55. doesn’t it
Ⅴ.
56. D 他们看见浓烟从窗户里冒出来。
57. B 我们一定要寻求帮助。
58. A 两兄弟沿着路边跑边喊叫。
59. D 敲门叫隔壁邻居，knock at“敲”。
60. C 给警察和消防队打电话。
61. B 通过窗户看见。
62. D 不能用can not,叙述过去发生的事要用can的一般过去时形式。
63. C 尽力把她抬出房子。
64. A 消防员到了，警察也来了。
65. B 她一再感谢……。
Ⅵ.
66. D 由句子Can you ask your mom to buy us some KFC fried chicken?可判断Jenny带fried chicken。
67. A Jenny, Gary, Lily, Gina, Leo一定参加，所以除了Amy至少是5个人参加。
68. D 由I will bring some beef noodles... Lily will take care of the drinks and Gina will bring a big homemade chocolate cake.可判断这是一个“每人自带一个菜的聚会”。
69. C 由句子You know it is too far for all of us to ride a bike there可知“他们不去买，是因为离那里太远”。
70. D 只让Jenny去邀请Amy，所以“我们不知她去不去”。这次聚餐是由Gary办的；聚餐派对在12：00开始（at noon）；Jenny带的炸鸡大家一起付钱，故A、B、C都不正确。
71. C 细节理解题。由第二段第二句可知答案。
72. D 细节理解题。由短文最后一句话Einstein replied that the questions were the same but the answers were different!得知。
73. C 推理判断题。由短文第三段第三到第五句可知，他认为记电话号码是浪费时间，故选C。
74. B 细节理解题。由第二段最后一句话知B正确：他认为人们需要从错误中学习。
75. A 推理判断题。由第三段第一句Einstein regarded time as a very important thing. 知选项A正确，其他三个选项皆不符合文义。
Ⅶ. 76. E 77. G 78. A 79.C 80. B
Ⅷ. 81. A sign at the bus stop.
82. Signs on the door tell you where to go in or out.
83. Yes, they can.
84. Books, magazines, TVs, radios and films all help us to communicate with others.
85. They all help us to know what is going on in the world and what other people are thinking about.
Ⅸ.
The toy car must be Jane’s little brother’s, because he is the only kid at the picnic. The new backpack must be Carol’s because she told me she bought a new one and it was fashion. The French book might be Li Ming’s. Because she’s the only one who’s studying French. The owner of the earrings can’t be a boy because boys don’t like wearing earrings at all.
Unit 6
第一部分 听力
1. A 2. B 3. B 4. A 5. A 6. B 7. B 8. A 9. A 10. C 11. A 12. C
13. B 14. C 15. C 16. B 17. C 18. B 19. A 20. C
听力原文
Ⅰ. 听句子，选择与其意思相符的图画。每个句子读一遍。
1. Bring me today’s newspaper, Simon.
2. Look! The two bulls are similar.
3. Our teacher is an old lady. She is a little fat.
4. Your new bike looks nice. When did you buy it?
5. Would you like to eat some ice cream? It’s hot today.
Ⅱ. 听下面的五段对话，每段对话后有一个问题。从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳答案。每段对话和问题读两遍。
6. W: Mike, why do you like the Latin Sound?
M: Because they’re fantastic.
Q: What does Mike think of the Latin Sound?
7. M: How can I get to the station?
W: The No. 5 bus will take you there. It’s opposite the park.
Q: Where is the station?
8. W: What was the meeting about, Mr Smith?
M: It was about “Saving the Earth”. Some experts were present at the meeting and gave important reports about pollution.
Q: What do you think Mr Smith did?
9. M: Of the two skirts we saw yesterday, which do you prefer?
W: I think the red one is prettier, but the yellow one is much cheaper. So I’ll take it.
Q: Which skirt will the woman take?
10. M: Jane, your brother Tim is the best person for the job.
W: Really? But he’s not experienced.
Q: What does Jane mean?
Ⅲ. 听对话，根据对话内容选择正确答案。对话读两遍。
M: Hello, may I speak to Jenny?
W: Jenny speaking. Who’s that?
M: This is Li Ming. What are you doing now?
W: I’m learning Chinese. I want to be a Chinese teacher when I’m older. What about you?
M: I’m learning English. My English is a little poor. Can you tell me some good techniques for learning English?
W: Sure. You must read a lot and speak English every day. Watching English TV and movies is a good way, too.
M: Good ideas. I must work hard at English. Learning English will help me find a good job in the future.
W: What are you going to be when you’re a man?
M: I want to be a businessman.
W: English is the language of international business. Many businessmen learn English so they can have more success in business. Please study hard, and you’ll be a good businessman.
M: Thanks a lot.
Ⅳ. 听短文，根据短文内容回答问题。短文读两遍。
Jesse Owens was born in 1913 in a poor, black family. When Owens was a boy, he could run very fast. In high school he was the No.1 in long jump.Owens’ family was quite poor so they didn’t have enough money to send him to college. However, because he was a wonderful sportsman, he could get money to go on with his studies in Ohio State
University. In 1935 he broke three world records in less than an hour!The 1936 Summer Olympics were held in Berlin, Germany. At the Olympics, Jesse Owens won both the 100-metre race and the 200-metre race. In the 200-metre race he set a new Olympic record.Then came the long jump. A German sportsman broke the Olympic record. Hitler said he would congratulate the winner personally. But Owens still had one more jump. He jumped several inches farther than the German sportsman. Hitler was very angry and left in a hurry. Jesse Owens, a black American, had won his fourth gold medal at the Olympics. He was one of the greatest sportsmen in America. And he was very important to his country.
第二部分 英语知识运用
Ⅰ. 21. displaying 22. energy 23. photographs/photos 24.cancer 25. sweet
26. prefer 27. expecting 28. entertainment 29. reminds 30. lyrics
Ⅱ. 31. C 题意：我喜欢那些会自己写歌的歌唱家。此题考查定语从句关系代词的用法。when指时间，which指物，who指人，由先行词singer是人可知，正确答案为C。
32. A 题意：这个名人死后，他的一些照片在这个展览馆展览。此题考查短语on display意为“展览；陈列”。选项A符合。
33. A 题意：动作片使我想起成龙。remind表示“使某人想起……”，常用结构remind sb. of...，所以选A，其他三个选项都不符合题意。
34. C 题意：你的故事引起了我的兴趣，我以前从未听说这么有趣的故事。interesting是形容词，有主动意味，意为“有趣的”，作表语时，主语通常是物，故A不符合题意； interested也是形容词，有被动意味，意为“感兴趣的，对……感兴趣”，主语通常是人, 且多用于be /become interested in结构中，故B、D不符合题意；interest用做动词时意为“使（人）发生兴趣”，其主语多为事物。故C符合题意。
35. C 题意：这个西红柿尝起来很甜。我非常喜欢。taste为系动词，意为“尝起来”，后跟形容词作表语，选项B为副词，故排除B。interesting意为“有趣的”， boring意为“令人生厌的；乏味的”，均不符合句意，而sweet“甜的”，符合句意，故选C。
36. D 题意：无论你做什么，都对我无关紧要。what, which和 when都是疑问词，引导的特殊疑问句用疑问语序，不符合句法，whatever是连接代词用于引导让步状语从句，意为“任何事物，无论什么”，符合句意，故选D。
37. B 题意：我奶奶宁愿去散步而不愿看电视。prefer+(doing) sth.+to (doing) sth.表示“宁愿……而不愿……”。选项B符合。
38. B 题意：顾名思义，这首歌曲很轻柔。think“想；思考”, look“看；瞧”，notice“注意,注意到”，根据句意均不符合，而suggest意为“暗示；显示”，符合句意，故选B。
39. B 题意：“在电影院里不要发出任何噪音。”“对不起，我不会了。”此题考查交际用语。对别人提出的责备应该先表示歉意，再表示自己的意愿。故选B。
40. B 题意：杰克是个诚实的男孩，他非常受欢迎。honest是以元音音素开头的单词，故用不定冠词an。
41. D 题意：“妈妈，我已经通过了期末考试。”“祝贺你。”此题考查交际用语。对别人取得的成功或成绩表示祝贺应该用Congratulations。
42. A 题意：那件丝制的衬衫非常贵。我买不起。此题考查定语从句。四个选项中可以引导定语从句的只有that,故选A。
43. C 题意：我不喜欢那些无聊的电影。这里先行词为movies，在定语从句中作主语，要用关系代词。who为关系代词，指人;what为疑问代词;不可以作关系代词;where 为关系副词。that为关系代词，既指人又指物，符合题意，故选C。
44. C 题意：我真的不喜欢那些持续很长时间的电影。when指时间；who指人；that指人或物，由先行词movies是物，故正确答案为C。
45. A 题意：“晚饭准备好了。请随便用。”“哇！尝起来太好吃了。请你告诉我如何做的好吗？” look 为连系动词时，意为“看起来”；sound为连系动词时，意为“听起来”，不符合句意；feel为连系动词时，意为“感觉”；taste的意思是“尝，品尝”，后面加形容词构成系表结构，符合题意。
Ⅲ. 46. prefers，to 47. who/that writes 48. reminded, of 49. on display 50. that/who has
Ⅳ. 51. mainly 52. latest 53. tasty 54. agreement 55. catch
Ⅴ. 56. B 由“her students did well in their lessons.”可知她是位老师，故选B。
57. C 根据“The old man looks after his wife well”可知“因为她的丈夫把她照顾得很好，所以她从不担心任何事情”。
58. D 根据上文可见“她非常幸福”。故选D。
59. D 由下一句“Sometimes she forgets what she did or will do.”可知“她的记忆力下降”。
60. A 根据上下文肯定是“她的丈夫发现了这个问题”。
61. A 根据上句“...asked her to see a famous doctor who lives in the capital.”可知他买了两张去伦敦的飞机票。
62. B them指代the two tickets。
63. A 由下一句“to catch the plane”可知“乘飞机去伦敦”，所以去的地方是“飞机场”。
64. D 根据下句她把票放在钢琴上可判断“她希望带来了钢琴”。
65. A 根据上文可知她去伦敦的目的是“see a doctor”。
Ⅵ.
66. A 细节理解题。根据第三段第一句可以知道Jeffery的父母住在Los Angeles；根据第二段第一句话who left him 26 years ago，可知是26年前；根据第一段第一句话可知Jeffery的工作是研究计算机。故选A。
67. B 推理判断题。由第二段第一句可推出“一年前没找到他的父母，因为没有通过因特网得到有用的信息，故选B。
68. C 词义猜测题。根据其宾语“happiness”意为“快乐”，可以猜测share意为“分享”，意思是to have something with others。
69. D 细节理解题。根据第二段最后一句可知答案选D。
70. C 细节理解题。根据文意Jeffery高兴的原因应该是“终于找到自己的父母”，答案选C。
71. B 细节理解题。由全文可知文章共提到popular music, folk music和country music三种音乐。
72. C 细节理解题。根据第三段第三句“那些被青年人喜爱的歌手才能成为明星”可知选C。
73. B 细节理解题。根据第四段最后一句中可知答案选B。
74. D 细节理解题。根据第一段Students buy large speakers and play the music loudly as they drive on the street.可判断选项D为正确答案。
75. A 主旨大意题。这篇文章主要介绍美国音乐。只有选项A与内容相符。
Ⅶ. 76. I think so
77. What kind of music do you like?
78. that I can dance to
79. make the time shorter
80. the sound of the sea/the singing of the birds
Ⅷ. 81. arrive; noon
82. we waited until 5 o’clock.
83.演出持续了三个小时。
84. next
85. excited, happy
Ⅸ.
Hello, everyone! I’m Emily, from the USA. I have some hobbies; Let me tell you, OK? I like light music, which is quiet and gentle, and it can make me go to bed easily. My favorite band is F4 in China. Because the singers sing the songs that are energetic, they are good singers. I like books that are exciting and magic. So Harry Potter is my favorite. I like movies that have beautiful actors, especially Titanic, but the end is sad. It often makes me cry. Now you may know me a lot. Let’s be friends.
Unit 7
第一部分 听力
1. E 2. C 3. B 4. A 5. D 6. C 7. B 8. C 9. B 10. A 11. C 12. B
13. A 14. C 15. C 16. A 17. C 18. C 19. A 20. C
听力原文
Ⅰ. 听句子，选出相应的图画。每个句子读一遍。
1. They are going camping.
2. I am going to climb the mountain.
3. Philip and his brother are visiting their grandmother for vacation.
4. Jim is babysitting his little brother.
5. I am relaxing at home for my holiday.
Ⅱ. 听句子，选出该句的最佳答语。每个句子读一遍。
6. Do you think the poem is wonderful?
7. Wish you good luck in this exam!
8. The language seems easy to learn.
9. Hi! You look so happy today.
10. Thanks a lot for giving us so much help.
Ⅲ. 请听对话及问题，选择最佳答案。每段对话和问题读两遍。
11. M: How did your parents like the film last night, Mary?
W: My mother thought the film was full of violence and terrible. But my father liked such an action film.
Q: What did Mary’s parents think about the film?
12. M: What were you doing between 8 o’clock and 9 o’clock last night?
W: I was reading a novel. At 8:10, I noticed that James came back to his home. And about thirty minutes later, I heard a big noise in his house. Then I saw a man run out of his house.
M: Yes. James was murdered at that time.
Q: What time was James murdered in his house last night?
13. W: May I help you?
M: Yes, please. I want to borrow some CDs.
W: What kind of CD do you want?
M: About popular English films, like Gone with the Wind and Jane Eyre.
Q: Where does the dialogue happen?
14. W: It’s kind of you to help me with my English, Tom.
M: You’re welcome, Li Hua. You also often help me with my Chinese.
Q: Why does Li Hua thank Tom?
15. W: Have you got any books on colors and moods, Mr Wang? I’d like to borrow one.
M: Of course. You can find them on the 4th shelf on the left.
Q: What kind of book does the woman want to borrow?
Ⅳ. 听短文，选择正确答案。短文读两遍。
Many teenagers feel that the most important people in their lives are their friends. They believe that their family members don’t know them as well as their friends do. In large families, it is quite often for brothers and sisters to fight with each other and then they can only go to their friends for some ideas.It is very important for teenagers to have a good friend or a group of friends. Even when they are not with their friends, they
usually spend a lot of time talking with them on the phone. This communication is very important for children’s growing up, because friends can discuss many things. These things are difficult to say to their family members.However, some parents often try to choose their children’s friends for them. Some parents may even stop their children from meeting their good friends. Before the parents doing that, they should know their children better.
第二部分 英语知识运用
Ⅰ. 21.pack 22. provided 23. underground 24. wine 25. light
26. translated 27. churches 28. thrilling 29. trek 30. consider
Ⅱ.
31. C 题意：“你愿意和我们一起打篮球吗？”“好啊。”选项A“谢谢你”，选项B“没关系”，选项D“没关系”，三项均不符合语境。
32. C 题意：他们乐意在我的公司工作。be willing to do意为“乐意做”，后跟动词原形作宾语，故选C。
33. B. 题意：“这星期天你打算做什么？”“我想洗衣服。”would like to do sth. 愿意做某事，选项B符合句意。
34. C 题意：我被允许继续用图书馆。continue 意思为“继续；坚持下去”，continue to do=continue doing“继续做某事”，故选C。
35. D 题意：“我希望某一天去夏威夷参观。”“我也想去。但在夏天那里又累人又拥挤。” thrilling令人激动的；fascinating迷人的，极美的，极好的；tired疲倦的，修饰人；tiring累人的，令人疲倦的，修饰物；故选D。
36. B 题意：这两个人走过这片森林，来到一座小房子前。across指从一个平面横过；through指从一个空间穿过；over指从上穿过，故选through。
37. C 题意：建造这座桥花了数百万人大约两年的时间。thousands of表约数概念，此时，thousand不能和具体数字连用。take“花费，用（时间）”, it takes sb. to do sth.做某事花费多少时间。故选C。
38. B 题意：这位外国人喜爱人们很友好的地方。在定语从句中，先行词places是地点时，要用关系副词where来引导。故选B。
39. B 题意：“你能给我们提供一些有关电脑的信息吗？”“当然可以。”provide...with
为……提供……。about“有关，关于”，根据句意选B。
40. D 题意：我想下周来看你。I’d是I would的缩写形式，应用would like to do sth.结构，意思是“想要（愿意）去做某事”。故选D。
41. C 题意：“香港人非常友好。”“是的，但这个时节游人太多。”tourist 名词，游客；tour动词，旅行,旅游；touristy形容词，游客很多的；touring 是动词tour 的现在分词。根据题意选C。
42. D 题意：许多学生说他们梦想有一天飞到月球上去。dream of为固定搭配，意为“梦想；幻想；向往”，后跟动名词作宾语，选项D符合题意。dream about+名词，“梦到，梦见”。
43. C 题意：“你能告诉我在下个假期我们去哪里度假吗？”“为什么不考虑去悉尼呢？” consider doing sth. 考虑去做某事。选项C为正确答案。
44. A 题意：不少学生因为恶劣的天气迟到了。选项B、D搭配不当，many不能与of 连用，而quite a few 为固定搭配，意为“相当多，不少”，符合句意，故选A。
45. B 题意：许多工人想尽快回家。as soon as possible 意思为“尽快……”。固定搭配as+形容词（副词）原级+as possible。
Ⅲ. 46. educational 47. Falls 48. tiring 49. translator 50. including
Ⅳ. 51. Where would, like 52. to visit 53. where, is 54. what else 55. took to
Ⅴ.
56. A 根据下文的I can work at home all the rest of the year可判断这里是at home。意思是“我家里有许多事要做”。
57. B “度假”应用动词spend。
58. C go south/north/west/east to somewhere意为朝着（东、南、西、北）方向去某处。
59. D too...to...为固定结构，意思是“太……而不……”。
60. A do want 表强调，意思是“我”真的很想去度假。整篇文章时态是现在时，故wanted不可选，其他两个选项无此用法。
61. D along the seashore意思是“沿着海边”。
62. C 在阳光下应该用in,而不是under。
63. A in和一段时间连用表示将来，而after只有和时间点连用可表示将来。
64. C think over意思是“仔细考虑”。
65. B 根据第一段作者觉得这个时候去山里不合适，所以这里应选mountains。
Ⅵ.
66. D 细节理解题。根据短文第一段第二句可知他们去森林的目的是看树木长得怎么样，选项D符合。
67. D 细节理解题。根据短文第二段可知“雪下得很大，致使路被大雪覆盖，路的标志看不到，路都是雪白的。因此Bob他们找不到回去的路。”
68. B 细节理解题。根据短文第二段最后一句可知他是想让马带他们回到宿营地，故选B。
69. C 细节理解题。根据短文最后一段最后一句可知“马停下来是因为到了帐篷跟前，即到了宿营地”，故选C。
70. A 推理判断题。由第二段第一句“...it started to snow.”可推断出是“冬天”；由第三段最后一句“That would be a trip of thirty-five kilometers in such cold weather! ”可知“寒冷”，选项A符合短文内容。
71. C 细节理解题。根据短文第四段第一句可知节约用钱是旅游的最重要的一步，即“首要做的事情。”
72. B 细节理解题。由短文倒数第四段可知“去游客多的大城市花费多，而不如去小城镇”即“不出名的地方”，选项B与内容相符。
73. C 细节理解题。根据倒数第二段可知选项C与之相符；根据文中倒数第三段和倒数第五段可知选项A、B与文中内容不符。由文中最后一段可知D项谈论的是“目的”，而不是“准备”的建议。
74. D 推理判断题。由文中倒数第二段“Travel books will give you the information on the cheapest hotels and restaurants.”可知D项不正确。
75. A 主旨大意题。由于这篇文章所讲的是为旅游作准备的事情，故选项A是最佳题目，选项B、C、D作为题目都太大或太小，故不选。
Ⅶ. 76. E 77. A 78. G 79. C 80. B
Ⅷ. 81. California
82. about 800,000
83. over 4,200
84. The Golden Gate Bridge，Fisherman’s Wharf，the Asian Art Museum，Alcatraz and the Twin Peaks
85. Mediterranean climate，with warm winters and cool summers
Ⅸ.
In winter holiday, I would go to Jiuzhaigou by plane with my sister and brothers. I’d like to go there because there are many cute animals and a lot of beautiful trees and the view there is very beautiful.
We would stay there for a month. In Jiuzhaigou, we would see the waterfall. And that would be my first time to see a waterfall. The beautiful views there would make the holiday enjoyable and we would have a wonderful time.
Unit 8
第一部分 听力
1. C 2. E 3. A 4. B 5. D 6. A 7. A 8. C 9. B 10. A 11. B 12. B
13. C 14. A 15. C 16. C 17. B 18. B 19. A 20. A
听力原文
Ⅰ. 根据你所听到的句子，选出符合句意的图片。每个句子读一遍。
1. Reading aloud can practise our pronunciation.
2. I don’t think boys should be allowed to have long hair.
3. He is really anxious because he can’t find his key to the bike.
4. My brother likes eating ice cream on a hot day. There’s nothing better.
5. It’s peaceful at home when the children are at school.
Ⅱ. 听下面的五段对话，每段对话后有一个问题。从题中所给的A、B、C三个选项中选出最佳答案。每段对话和问题读两遍。
6. W: I’ve been told we are going to visit Japan next week.
M: Yes, we are. We’ll go by plane and it takes off at eight next Monday.
W: Great!
Q: When will they leave for Japan next week?
7. W: How long have you been driving cars, John?
M: You know I’m twenty-seven now. About ten years ago, I began driving.
W: Oh. Much earlier than me.
Q: When did John begin driving?
8. W: I feel very sleepy.
M: So do I.
W: But Jack’s radio is too noisy.
M: He’s always disturbing others! Everyone is fed up with him.
Q: What do they think of Jack?
9. W: Will you be free this afternoon?
M: Sorry, I’m afraid not. What’s up?
W: I’ve got two concert tickets.
M: Oh, I’ll try to go with you.
Q: What does the woman want the man to do?
10. W: Hello, Tom. I’m sorry. I’m late.
M: It doesn’t matter. But try not to be late. What time did you get up in the morning?
W: I got up at twenty past seven. But I often get up at a quarter past seven.
M: You should get up earlier in the future.
Q: What time does the woman often get up in the morning?
Ⅲ. 听对话，根据对话内容选择正确的答案。对话读两遍。
W: Mr Green, may I ask you some questions?
M: Sure. What do you want to know?
W: How many ways are there for us students to learn something?
M: First, you can learn something at school. But this is not the only way for students to learn. There is another way to learn. It is that students can teach themselves. And it’s not a difficult thing. We can do this at any place, at any time.
W: How do we teach ourselves?
M: The first thing you must do is reading. Read something you are interested in, or something you have to read. The second is that you must ask yourself questions. It’s better that you write them down. Sometimes you can ask other people. This is the way of teaching yourself. And you must do this all by yourself. If you keep doing like this for a long time, you’re sure to succeed in your study.
W: Thank you very much for your advice.
M: You’re welcome.
Ⅳ. 请听短文，选择最佳答案。短文读两遍。
I’m a boy of 13 years old. I had got different dreams for the future at different ages.When I was five, I hoped to have delicious food and have a big meal all the time. When I was nine, I hoped to be a famous ping-pong player in the future. So I asked my parents to buy me a ping-pong table. When I got one, my friends came to play with me every day. But soon later, I didn’t like this game any more. When I was ten years old, I dreamed of going to the moon and playing basketball with my friends there. I started to talk about space all the time at school. But my classmates just said, “Stop daydreaming!” So I gave it up, too.Now I grow up and know that I need a plan. I need enough money to do some meaningful things. So I decide to learn about business. In this way, I think I can get rich and use my money to help lots of people.
第二部分 英语知识运用
Ⅰ. 21. signs 22. established 23. coach 24. advertisement 25. appreciate
26. similar 27. imagine 28. repair 29. blind 30. hunger
Ⅱ. 31. B 题意：他非常善良，他愿意帮助那些无家可归的孩子。rich有钱的,富有的；happy 高兴的；smart聪明的,可爱的；homeless无家的,无家可归的。根据句意选B。
32. B 题意：这些年轻的志愿者能帮助把城市公园扫干净。clean up把……弄干净。help后接动词原形或不定式。
33. D 题意：她正计划着学开车呢，让我们帮助她想出一些好主意。stay up熬夜;call up打电话;look up查寻;think up想出，根据句意，故正确答案为D。
34. C 题意：今天上午新老师就把新书分发给所有学生了。hand in意为“上交”；give up“放弃”；give away意为“捐赠”，均不符句意。hand out “分发”。
35. C 题意：“对不起，因为路上太拥挤，我迟到了。”“没关系，但是明天请准时到。”本题考查交际用语。It’s a pleasure“很高兴”；You’re welcome“不客气”；It doesn’t matter“没关系”；That’s right“正确”。根据题意选C。
36. A 题意：“她长得怎么样？”“她长得像她的妈妈。”take after与……相像；be similar to与……相似，这里无be动词；look after和take care of是“照顾；照看”的意思。故选A。
37. A 题意：上个月在那个国家成立了一个新政府。set up建立,创立；put up建造；stay up
熬夜；fix up修理,改进。选项A符合句意。
38. B 题意：尽管你很忙，但你不能推延制定我们的计划。put off后跟动词-ing形式，故选B。
39. C 题意：政府已经为那些无家可归的人搭建了许多帐篷。put away把……收起，放好；put on穿上,戴上；put down放下；put up建造，搭起。选项C符合句意。
40. A 题意：我考试不及格时，我父亲帮我摆脱困难。come out出版；hand out分发，发放；give out分发，均不符合句意。help sb. out意为“帮助某人解决困难”，故选A。
41. A 题意：托尼与他爷爷很相似，十分有趣。be similar to 与……相似，是固定搭配。
42. B 题意：你可以去看望生病住院的孩子，让他们振作起来。take after 相像；look after照顾，照看。都不符合句意。cheer up“使……振作/兴奋”，是动词+副词的短语，代词作宾语要放在动词和副词之间，故选B。
43. B 题意：请把茶杯里装满水。Fill...with用……把……盛满，符合句意。
44. A 题意：很感激你给我们这么多帮助。appreciated 为appreciate的形容词，意思为“令人感激的”。符合题意。
45. D 题意：汤姆，请到那间房间去把那些书拿给我。take带去，拿去，bring带来，拿来，carry运载，携带，fetch则表示“去拿来”（go and bring）的意思。根据句意选D。
Ⅲ. 46.put up, to collect
47. clean, up, at once/ right away
48. put off
49. handed, out
50. cheer up
Ⅳ. 51. C 罗莎的谎言经常让同学们信以为真，说明她骗人时自信心强，把握大。故选择sure。
52. B 与下文罗莎自欺欺人相对应，一开始她认为骗人是件有趣的事。
53. A 根据文意，经过这件事后她意识到骗人其实就是骗自己，这种意识在与同学交谈时感受到，故选talk。
54. B 夏天到时，罗莎就会到爸爸农场去度假，故选arrive。
55. C help with sth. 意为“帮助干事情”。
56. C 爸爸没时间陪她去其他地方游玩，说明爸爸很忙，故选busy。
57. C 这里meet表示爸爸去机场接她。
58. B 在农场度假结束后，罗莎应返回城里，故选city。
59. D 根据文意暑假结束了，罗莎要返回到妈妈身边。故选 returned。
60. A 与上文相对应，她的朋友都在谈假期与家人的旅游，罗莎因此希望拥有一个完整的家庭。
61. B 假期结束了，新学期又开始了，且下文讲到了学校里的事情，故选school。
62. D 下文的例子既不是城市也不是人或语言而是两个国家，只有选places。
63. B 别人问起她夏天的旅游情况时，她只有编一些不真实的事情骗大家，故选true。
64. A 下文老师让她讲在英国旅行的情况，说明她骗大家去了英国，故选England。
65. C 老师让罗莎对过去的事情进行回忆并讲述，故选remember。
Ⅴ.
66. A 细节理解题。根据文章第一段最后一句可知选A。
67. C 细节理解题。根据图表中二月份对应的是40，故选C。
68. B 细节理解题。根据表中四月份和五月份可计算出：60（四月份）-80（五月份）=20，即多出了20个瓶子。
69. D 细节理解题。根据题干“收集瓶子数量相同的月份”，根据图表，相同的月份只有“Sep.”和“Mar.”，故选D。
70. A 细节理解题。根据表中(Jan.) 20+(Feb.)40+(Mar.)60=120，故选C。
71. B 细节理解题。依据本文第二段：Paul answered,“Yes, my brother gave it to me for Christmas.”The boy was surprised.故答案选B。
72. A 细节理解题。依据第四段“I wish...that I could be a brother like that”和倒数第二段， “And some day I’m going to give you one just like it...”，故选A。
73. D 推理判断题。依据本文倒数第二段的最后一句话可知选D。
74. B 推理判断题。从顽童的言行之中可以看出他对残疾弟弟有深深的爱。
75. C 主旨大意题。本文叙述了两对兄弟的关爱之情。Paul的哥哥送给他一辆小汽车作为圣诞礼物，顽童虽然没有Paul哥哥那样的经济条件，但他有着一份对残疾弟弟的深深的爱。故选项C为最佳题目。
Ⅵ. 76. be 77. kind 78. with 79. how 80. else
81. up 82. care 83. job 84. Maybe 85. When
Ⅶ. 86. B 87. D 88. C 89. A 90. bad
Ⅷ.
Next Sunday is our school volunteer day. We will go to the old people’s home and kindergarten to do some volunteer work. In the morning we’ll visit the old. Because I like singing, I will teach them to sing songs or sing for the old to cheer them up.
In the afternoon, we’ll go to the local kindergarten. I like children and I’ll play games with the children there and also I could help teach them to read there.
It’ll be a busy day. But I’m looking forward to its coming.
Unit 9
第一部分 听力
1. C 2. A 3. A 4. B 5. C 6. C 7. C 8. C 9. C 10. B 11. B 12. B
13. C 14. C 15. A 16. Lion 17. Dahua 18. gate 19. coffee 20. 6:30
听力原文
Ⅰ. 听句子，选出正确的答语。每个句子读一遍。
1. Sorry, I made a mistake!
2. What should you say if you make a mistake?
3. How much does the pen cost?
4. Don’t you think he is eating too much?
5. May I have your full name, please?
Ⅱ. 听下面的五段对话，每段对话后有一个问题，请根据所提的问题选择正确的图画。每段对话和问题读两遍。
6. M: What was the weather like when you were on holiday?
W: It blew strongly.
Q: What was the weather like on that day?
7. W: It’s Jim’s birthday this Friday. What shall we give him?
M: Mum, it’s difficult. A football? A pencil box? But he has already got several of those.
W: We could get him something to wear. No, let’s get him a book on sports. He likes that very much.
M: Oh, why not?
Q: What will Jim get for his birthday?
8. W: Can I help you?
M: I’d like to borrow a book.
W: What book are you going to borrow?
M: Fly to the Moon.
W: Here you are.
M: Thanks.
Q: Where are they talking?
9. M: What fruits shall we get for the picnic, Lily?
W: Can we just get some oranges and bananas?
M: I don’t like oranges. How about some apples instead?
W: They are so expensive at the moment. Let’s get the bananas then.
Q: What fruit are they going to take for the picnic?
10. M: Do you mind if I smoke?
W: I’m afraid this is a non-smoking office. You could go outside.
Q: Which is the right sign?
Ⅲ. 请听短文，选择正确答案。短文读两遍。
The Greens visited China last October. Before they came to China, Mr Green had booked three air tickets. The plane took off at 7:45 a.m. on October 14 in London. And the flight number was BA 345. The journey was too long. Mr and Mrs Green and their son Jim had to change planes in Moscow. The flight number of the second plane was CA 907. When they arrived in Beijing, it was 10:30 p.m. They were very tired, but they felt very happy.
Ⅳ. 听对话，根据所听内容完成表格。对话读两遍。
M: What are you going to do tonight, Anna?
W: Nothing much.
M: Would you like to go to the movies?
W: That’s a good idea. What should we see?
M: Let’s go and see the Lion King.
W: I saw it last week, but I don’t mind seeing it again.
M: Really? What do you think of it?
W: I think it’s the best one of all. It tells how an African lion becomes a king.
M: I see. Let’s go to Dahua Movie Theatre.
W: OK. We can have some coffee nearby before the movie.
M: All right. Then where shall we meet?
W: How about meeting at the gate of our school?
M: Good. What time?
W: Is half past six OK?
M: OK. See you.
W: See you.
第二部分 英语知识运用
Ⅰ. 21. ancient 22. noticed 23. produced 24. throw 25. develop
26. pleasant 27. baskets 28. sour 29. invented 30. reminded
Ⅱ. 31. B 题意：在我回家的路上，我偶然遇见了我的一位老朋友。by accident意外地， 无意中地，符合句意，故选B。
32. B 题意：这种茶产于华南。根据句意要用被动语态。find强调在经过“寻找”（look for）后“找的结果”（找到或找不到），又可以表示“（偶然地）发现……”；invent指“发明”，即原来没有而后来发明创造的东西；produce指“生产,出产”，符合句意，故选B。
33. A 题意：它是用来在黑暗中看清东西的。be used for“被用做”,这个短语中的for是个介词,后面可以跟名词、代词、动名词。所以应该用see的动名词形式seeing。
34. D 题意：“你们的城市看上去很美！”“是的。去年栽了很多树，种植了很多草。”根据last year用一般过去时态的被动语态，即was/were+动词的过去分词。故选D。
35. D 题意：“花什么时候浇的水？”“两个小时前。”根据句意用一般过去时态的被动语态，即was/were+动词的过去分词。故排除A、C。而选项B与主语的数不一致，故选D。
36. D 题意：我喜欢这种饮料，因为它有一种甜味。sound意为“声音”，energy意为“活力；力量”，tasty为形容词，意为“味道好的”，均不符合题意。而taste既可作动词，也可作名词，作名词时，意为“味道；风味”，符合题意，故选D。
37. B 题意：学生在课堂上应当活跃。act 为动词，意为“表演；行动”，active为形容词，意为“活泼的；积极的”，action为名词，意为“行动;行为”，activity为名词，意为“活动;活动力”，这里be后跟形容词，故选项B符合题意。
38. B 题意：我乘错了火车，半小时后我才知道。by mistake 意为“错误地”，为固定搭配。根据句意选B。
39. D 题意：这样，他收集了很多邮票。on the way在……的路上；in the way 挡道；by the way 顺便说一声，顺便问一句；in this way这样。根据句意选D。
40. B 题意：这种茶发出一种宜人的气味。please动词，意为“使高兴,使喜欢,使满意”；pleasant形容词，意为“令人愉快的;舒适的”；pleasure名词，意为“愉快,高兴;满足”；pleased形容词，意为“高兴的,喜欢的”，修饰人。根据句意选B。
41. A 题意：这位老人创作了很多歌曲。create意为“创作，创造”，make意为“制造，制作”，find意为“发现，找到”，produce意为“生产、产生”，根据句意选A。
42. B 题意：这座桥是由农民们自己在2002年建造的。根据句意要用过去时的被动语态。被动语态由be+动词的过去分词，选项B符合题意。
43. C 题意：“我不在的时候不要动我的电脑。”“我不会动的。”本题考查交际用语。由题意看出不去动电脑是将来要发生的动作，故选C。
44. A 题意：第一台电脑在1945年被发明的。根据句意应该用被动语态，所以排除C、D两个选项。discover指“发现”某种本来存在，而以前未被发现的事物或未为人所知的东西；invent指“发明”，即原来没有而后来发明创造的东西。电脑是原来没有的，故选A。
45. C 题意：你能根据信息编一个对话吗？according to为固定搭配，意思为“根据；按照；据……所说”，符合句意。故选C。
Ⅲ. 46. wooden 47. develop 48. mixture 49. taste 50. helpful
Ⅳ. 51. bought 52. is used for 53. Who were 54. When was, invented 55. What is
Ⅴ. 56. A Thomas Edison是位大发明家，所以大多数人都知道他，故选A。
57. A 根据上句“At that time there was no electric lamp in the world.”可知：当时没有电，给人带来麻烦。
58. B find “发现；找到”；invent“发明”，强调；discover“发现”，强调发现已经有的事物。
59. B 依据下文“...but you’ve failed 1 200 times
”可断定他实验了很多次，结果都失败了，选项B意思与上下句意思相符。
60. C 根据上下句可知“他的朋友建议他停止实验，但他没听他们的建议。”
61. B 根据上文“He didn’t know which material was suited to be a lamp filament”可知：他不知道什么材料适合作灯丝，因此他尽力找材料。
62. D 当他的朋友进来的时候，他正在实验室里做实验。
63. A 他朋友来了，他应当请他坐下来。
64. B 由上句“The man sat for a long time and Edison said nothing to him.”可推断“这个人肯定很生爱迪生的气”。
65. B 查上下句的理解。由他的朋友的话“You’ve done the experiments 1,200 times but you’ve failed 1 200 times.”可知“爱迪生已经知道了1 200种材料不适合作灯丝。
Ⅵ. 66. C 细节理解题。由第二段第二句可判断出：他们发明球的原因是扔石头的游戏会伤着孩子。故选C。
67. D 推理判断题。从第二段“他们发明球的原因是因为石头对孩子有危险”可推断出：孩子们喜欢球的根本原因是“扔石头危险，而扔球较安全”，故选D。
68. A 细节理解题。由第三段前两句“At first, they used tree leaves to make balls. They used vines to keep the leaves together.”可知：开始的球是用tree leaves和vines做成的，选A。
69. B 细节理解题。由最后一段第一句“Before long they invented a lot of ball games”可判断：埃及人发明了很多不同 “球”的游戏。
70. B 推理判断题。全文主要介绍了“球”的发明。通过文章主题和日常生活常识可推断出：打球可以使人健康，故选B。
71. C 细节理解题。由第一段最后两句“The first car was invented by an American. His name was Henry Ford.”可知正确答案选C。
72. B 细节理解题。由第二段第四句可判断选项B为正确答案。
73. B 细节理解题。由第二段五、六句可判断B为正确答案。
74. C 细节理解题。由第三段第二句“He wished to make a machine.”可判断C为正确答案。
75. B 细节理解题。由第二段五、六句知：白天 “two dollars and fifty cents”和晚上“another dollar”，合计为“Three dollars and fifty cents”，故与选项B相符。
Ⅶ. 76. D 77. F 78. A 79. E 80. B
Ⅷ. 81. In the forest near a German town.
82. In 1724.
83. In 1799.
84. “Milk” and “Oh, God”.
85. In 1828.
Ⅸ.
The abacus was invented by Chinese people in the sixth century. It was used for counting. The bicycle was invented by people in England. It was invented in 1880s and was used for traveling. The potato chips was invented by George Grum in 1853. Of course, it was used for eating. Tea was invented over three thousand years ago. It was invented by the Chinese Emperor Shen Nung by accident. It was used for drinking. I think they are very useful now.
Unit 10
第一部分 听力
1. B 2. A 3. A 4. C 5. A 6. A 7. C 8. A 9. B 10. A 11. C 12. B
13. B 14. C 15. A 16. B 17. A 18. B 19. B 20. C
Ⅰ. 听句子，选择恰当的应答语。每个句子读一遍。
1. Maybe you should join an English club.
2. What did you use to be like?
3. If somebody helps you find your book, what should you say?
4. What have you done with the library book?
5. Whose volleyball is this?
Ⅱ. 听下面的五段对话，每段对话后有一个问题，请根据所提的问题选择正确的图画。每段对话和问题读两遍。
6. W: Where’s my pencil, Dad?
M: Pencil? Oh, it’s under the desk.
Q: What’s the girl looking for?
7. W: Have you seen the children?
M: Yes, they are drawing in the park.
Q: What are the children doing?
8. M: Were you ill yesterday, Emma?
W: Yes, I had a toothache.
Q: What’s the matter with Emma?
9. W: Excuse me, could you tell me where I’ll get off if I want to go to the theatre?
M: At the next stop.
Q: Where are they talking now?
10. W: You don’t look healthy, Tom.
M: I’m not feeling well. I think I should go to bed and have a rest.
Q: What should Tom do?
Ⅲ. 在录音中你将听到一段对话及五个问题，请根据对话内容及问题选择正确答案。对话读两遍，每个句子仅读一遍。
M: Mary, do you enjoy listening to pop music?
W: No, not at all.
M: Why? The pop music is loved by most young people.
W: I don’t understand it.
M: If you don’t understand it, how can you say that you don’t love it?
W: I feel it is noisy and meaningless.
M: My opinion is different from yours. Some pop songs are serious.
W: I have never heard serious pop songs.
M: Pop singers are trying to express their feelings about the life of ordinary people.
W: Then they should keep their feelings to themselves.
M: It seems that we cannot agree with each other about the matter.
W: Yes, you have your opinion, but I have mine.
Questions:
11. Does Mary enjoy listening to pop music?
12. Who likes pop music best?
13. Why doesn’t Mary like pop music?
14. What does the man think of pop music?
15. Does Mary agree with the man?
Ⅳ. 请听短文，选出正确答案。短文读两遍。
In England, cars, buses and bikes must keep to the left side of the street. If a person wishes to cross the street, he must stop and either look at the traffic lights or look at the both ways of the street. And instead of looking left first, as we do in China, they look right first. To get about in London, visitors must learn to use buses and underground. First of all, they must know which direction they are going to and which bus and which underground they must take. At the bus stop， they must wait in line for buses. As soon as they get on a bus, they must pay for their tickets.
第二部分 英语知识运用
Ⅰ. 21. overslept 22. relatives 23. announced 24. reveal 25. embarrassed
26. exhausted 27. farmers 28. marry 29. empty 30.lock
Ⅱ. 31. C 题意：当我到达学校时，我意识到我的作业忘在家里了。表示“把某物落在某处了”必须用leave sth. +地点；forget只能表示“忘了”，但其后不可跟地点，不能表示忘在了什么地方。故不选B、D。根据句意可以判断发生动作的时间是过去的过去，所以用过去完成时。故选C。
32. B 题意：“为什么你上学迟到了？”“因为我的闹钟没响，因此我起晚了。”go away意为“离开”，不符合句意，排除A、D。go off 意为“发出声响”，didn’t后用动词原形，故选B。
33. A 题意：这姑娘不得不与一个她不爱的人结婚。marry sb.意为“跟某人结婚”。不能说marry with sb.。但get married 若跟宾语时其后须先加to， 即 get married to sb. 选项A符合题意。
34. A 题意：因为昨天我干了很多家务活，所以我感到精疲力竭。embarrassing意为“使人尴尬的,令人为难的”；thrilling意为“令人兴奋的”，thrilled 意为“（人）兴奋的,极为激动的”，均不符合句意，exhausted 意为“精疲力竭的”，符合句意，故选A。
35. C 题意：上星期这个糟糕的消息在那个国家引起了一阵恐慌。set up意为“建立；成立”；take off意为“脱下”；go off意为“发出声响”。均不符合句意，而set off意为“激起；引起”，符合句意，故选C。
36. C 题意：“你发生了什么事？”“我睡过头了。当我起床的时候，我的父母已经去上班了”。oversleep的过去形式为overslept，故选C。
37. C 题意：当我到达车站的时候，早班车已经离开了。过去完成时表示在过去时间里已经完成的动作或状态,即“过去的过去”。根据句意要用过去完成时态，其结构为had+动词的过去分词。故选C。
38. A 题意：史密斯先生总有一些好消息告诉我们。本题考查形容词的位置。在“a piece of +名词”的结构中，形容词多置于piece或pair之前。有时也可置于名词之前。
39. A 题意：“为什么你没出现在昨天的学校聚会上？”“因为我妈妈生病住院了。”clean up意为“打扫”；think up意为“想出”；end up意为“以……结束”。故选项B、C、D都不符合句意。show up意为“出席;露面”，符合句意。
40. C 题意：老师希望学生按时来校。in time意为“及时”；by the time意为“到……的时候”，不符合句意，而on time意为“准时”，符合句意，故选C。
41. B 题意：“什么时候是愚人节？”“四月一日。”节日要大写，排除A、D。愚人节为April Fool’s Day，故选B。
42. D 题意：我上学迟到了，因为我的自行车出了故障。break down意为“停止运转；出故障”。根据句意用一般过去时态，且不用被动，故选D。
43. D 题意：“在2007以前，你去过香港吗？”“不，我没有”。根据答语，助动词要用had，所以选D。
44. B 题意：“你介意我用你的钢笔吗？”“当然不介意。”此题考查交际用语。A意为“介意”；B意为“不介意”；C意为“请随便吃”；D意为“对不起，我不介意”。根据题意选B。
45. B 题意：到我起床的时候，我的弟弟已经进入洗澡间了。by the time意为“到……的时候”，通常与过去时连用，主句用过去完成时，故选B。
Ⅲ. 46. Had, left 47. hadn’t read any, yet 48. What had, done 49. Why was
50. When had, left
Ⅳ. 51. had 52. had studied 53. got 54. overslept 55. was ringing 56. realized
57. being 58. hadn’t done 59. relaxing 60. had become
Ⅴ.
61. B 伊丽莎白穿过一道道门时,听见喊叫声从教室里沿着走廊传了过来。 walk through...“穿过……,经过……”。 walk over sb.“朝……走来”； walk in“走进……”,不符合语境。walk from doors意为“从门中走”,显然不符合逻辑,故排除。
62. A during the break“课间休息时”。根据语境,她站在操场上看孩子们活动,当然是指课间。 during the class“上课期间”；during the meeting“开会期间”；during school“在校期间”,均与语境不符。
63. B watch表示“注视着、观察着”,指有意识的行为。 根据语境,她站在操场上观察孩子们的举动。所以A，C，D均不符合语境。
64. A 相对于下文中的 the older,这里当然说的是那些年幼的,即 the younger。 smaller指个头小,与bigger相对,所以排除B，C两项；下文中谈的是 the older的情况,所以D项不对。
65. C ones替代复数可数名词children。 these不能用于替代,排除 B项；one替代单数可数名词,与语境不符；those用于替代,表特指,前面不能再加 the older修饰。
66. B 由下文可知,一群孩子围着一位年轻教师。 根据下文语境即可排除A，C，D项。
67. B up and down“上上下下,来来回回”。孩子们蹦跳着,当然应是jump up and down。 more or less程度副词短语“或多或少”；farther and farther“越来越远”；neck and neck“不分上下、并驾齐驱”,与语境显然不符。
68. D What was all that about？意为“为了什么事？”或“怎么回事？”。 A，B，C项不符合这一固定结构。
69. D 由语境可知,孩子们离开后,伊丽莎白问那位老师。 A，B，C的时态与本文时态明显不符。叙述过去的故事,当然应使用一般过去时。
70. B pull down“拆除(建筑物等)”。 pull over“将(车辆)靠在路边”；pull in指“(火车)到站”；pull out指“(火车)离站”,均与语境不符。
71. B 孩子们想去那里看老鼠。there指拆房屋的地方。 here“这里”；over there“到那边、在那边”,往往指离说话者不远的、能看得见的地方； near here“离这里很近”,很显然三者与语境不吻合。
72. A center on sth.“(使)集中,(使)成中心话题”。语境为：他们的全部课程都是以这个项目为中心的。B，C，D均不符合语境。
73. B 统计生产出的车的数量是数学课上的活动,根据语境可推知。A“英语”；C“历史”；D“体育”,在这些课上统计车的数量,不符合常识。
74. C 到汽车制造厂统计,自然是统计生产出的车的数量。 A、B、D均不符合“到汽车制造厂统计”这一语境。
75. A 对于一门课来说,老鼠是一种很好的研究对象。 如果选B，C两项，生物老师就不会带学生去看；beautiful指“美丽的、好看的”。老鼠谈不上美丽,所以排除D项。
Ⅵ.
76. B 推理判断题。由第一段可判断出这位女士太胖，而且有几个购物带。
77. B 细节理解题。由第一段第二句可知：他站了5分钟，即5分钟之后找到座位。故选B。
78. C 细节理解题。由第一段“Paul was very polite, so he stood up to let the fat lady get off before him.”可很明显地知道正确答案选C。
79. B 词义猜测题。根据上下文猜测room的意思为“空间，地方”，故选B。
80. A 细节理解题。根据上下文“她在座位上，由于她太胖，而且有几个购物带，”推断出她移不动或出不去。
81. D 细节理解题。可用排除法，根据文意B、C很容易被排除，而A“作者很无礼”，并没有这样的提示，故答案为D。
82. D 词义猜测题。根据上下文猜词义，作者前四次的境遇基本相同，当他走进第五个店时我们知道他这次改变了方法，不再说修理，而是问店主是否愿意买他的椅子，所以答案应该是D，“做事的方式”。
83. C 词义猜测题。根据“the penny dropped”的前后店主所说的话“You must be crazy”，店主认为作者给他27磅买自己的椅子是不可理喻的，但是很快他又说“I know what you want.You want me to repair your chair.”表明他明白作者并不是真的自己掏钱买自己的椅子，而是希望他能帮他修理椅子，这才是他的目的。答案为C。
84. A 细节理解题。fiver意思是五英镑钞票，文章倒数第二句说明作者须付五英镑的劳务费。答案为A。
85. C 推理判断题。纵观全文，作者在前四次碰壁后，马上调整一下自己的行为方式，最终达到了自己的目的，说明他很聪明。答案为C。
Ⅶ. 86. 109,000
87. 1,200,000
88. Nearly 99,000
89. 1.37
90. To follow the traffic rules
Ⅷ.
Last Sunday, all the students in our class went to the nursing home with our teacher Miss/Mr Li. There were many old people living there. We decided to work in groups and try our best to make them happy. Five (students) of us played chess with them. Ten students talked with them. Fifteen students did some washing for them. The other students cleaned their rooms and swept the floor. We did many things for the old people. At last, we sang songs and danced together. What a nice day!
Unit 1
一、知识点
1.Check in : 在旅馆的登记入住。 Check out: 在旅馆结账离开。
2.By: ①通过…..方式（途径）。例：I learn English by listening to tapes.
②在…..旁边。例：by the window/the door
③乘坐交通工具 例：by bus/car
④在……之前，到……为止。例：by October在10月前
⑤被 例：English is spoken by many people.
3.how与what的区别：
how通常对方式或程度提问，意思有：怎么样 如何，通常用来做状语、表语。
what通常对动作的发出者或接受者提问，意思为 什么，通常做宾语，主语。
①How is your summer holiday? It’s OK.(how表示程度 做表语)
②How did you travel around the world? I travel by air.
③What do you learn at school? I learn English, math and many other subjects.
① What…think of…? How…like…?
② What…do with…? How…deal with…?
③ What…like about…? How…like…?
④ What’s the weather like today? How’s the weather today?
⑤ What to do? How to do it?
e.g. What do you think of this book?=How do you like this book?
I don’t know what I should do with the matter.=I don’t know how I should deal with it.
What do you like about China?=How do you like China?
I don’t know what to do next step?=I don’t know how to do it next step?
㊣ What good / bad weather it is today!（weather为不可数名词，其前不能加 a ）
㊣ What a fine / bad day it is today! （day为可数名词，其前要加 a ）
4. aloud, loud与loudly的用法 : 三个词都与"大声"或"响亮"有关。
①aloud是副词,重点在出声能让人听见,但声音不一定很大,
常用在读书或说话上。通常放在动词之后。aloud没有比较级形式。
如: He read the story aloud to his son.他朗读那篇故事给他儿子听。
②loud可作形容词或副词。用作副词时,常与speak, talk, laugh等动词连用,多用于比较级,须放在动词之后。如:
She told us to speak a little louder. 她让我们说大声一点。
③loudly是副词,与loud同义,有时两者可替换使用,但往往
含有令人讨厌或打扰别人的意思,可位于动词之前或之后。如:
He does not talk loudly or laugh loudly in public. 他不当众大声谈笑。
5. voice 指人的嗓音 也指鸟鸣。
sound 指人可以听到的各种声音。
noise 指噪音、吵闹声
6. find + 宾语 + 宾补（名词 形容词 介词短语 分词等）
例：I find him friendly. I found him working in the garden.
We found him in bed. He found the window closed.
We found her honest.
7. 常见的系动词有：
①是：am 、is、 are
②保持：keep、 stay
③ 转变：become、 get、 turn
④ ……起来 feel、 look、 smell、 taste、 sound
8. get + 宾语+宾补（形容词 过去分词 动词不定式） 使某种情况发生
例：Get the shoes clean. 把鞋擦干净
Get Mr. Green to come. 让格林先生进来
I want to get my bike repaired. 我想去修自行车
You can’t get him waiting. 你不能让他老等着
9. 动词不定式做定语
①与所修饰的名词构成主谓关系
The next train to arrive was from New York. He is always the first to come.
②与所修饰的名词构成动宾关系
I have nothing to say. I need a pen to write with.
I need some paper to write on. I don’t have a room to live in.
10. practice , fun 做名词为不可数名词
11. add 补充说 又说
12. join 加入某团体 并成为其中一员 attend 出席参加会议或讲座
join in与take part in指参加到某项活动中去。
13.all、 both、 always以及every复合词与not连用构成部分否定。其完全否定为：all---none, both---neither, everything---nothing, everybody---nobody.
14. be afraid of doing sth. / sth.害怕 be afraid of being alone
be afraid to do sth.害怕
be afraid that恐怕担心，表示委婉语气
15.either：①放在否定句末表示“也”
②两者中的“任一”
③either…or…或者…或者.…引导主语部分，谓语动词按照就近原则
16.complete完成，是个较正式的词，后不能接动名词
finish指日常事物的完成
17.a,an 与序数词连用表示“又一”，“再一”。
例：Please give me a second apple. There comes a fifth girl.
18.have trouble/difficult/problem (in) doing….. 干…..遇到麻烦，困难
19.unless 除非，如果不，等于“if not”本身就表示否定，引导条件状语从句，主句为将来时，条件状语从句用一般现在时表示将来。
例：My baby sister doesn’t cry unless she’s hungry.
=My baby sister doesn’t cry if she isn’t hungry.
Unless you take more care, you’ll have an accident.
如果你不多加小心的话，你会出事的。
20.instead: adv. 代替，更换。
例：We have no coffee, would you like tea instead？
我们没有咖啡了，改喝茶好吗？
It will take days by car, so let’s fly instead.
开车去要好几天呢，咱们还是坐飞机吧。
Tom was ill, so I went instead.汤姆病了，所以换了我去。
instead of doing sth. 作为某人或某事物的替换
例：Let’s play cards instead of watching TV.
We sometimes eat rice instead of potatoes.
Give me the red one instead of the green one.
21.spoken 口头的，口语的。spoken English 口头英语
speaking 讲话的，说某种语言的。Speaking skills讲英语的能力
22. 提建议的句子：
①What/ how about +doing sth.? 如：What/ How about going shopping?
②Why don’t you + do sth.? 如：Why don’t you go shopping?
③Why not + do sth. ? 如：Why not go shopping?
④Let’s + do sth. 如： Let’s go shopping
⑤Shall we/ I + do sth.? 如：Shall we/ I go shopping?
23. a lot 许多 常用于句末 如：I eat a lot. 我吃了许多。
24. too…to 太…而不能 常用的句型 too+adj./adv. + to do sth.
如：I’m too tired to say anything. 我太累了，什么都不想说。
25. not …at all 一点也不 根本不 如：
I like milk very much. I don’t like coffee at all.
我非常喜欢牛奶。我一点也不喜欢咖啡。
not经常可以和助动词结合在一起，at all 则放在句尾
26.be / get excited about sth.=== be / get excited about doing sth.
=== be excited to do sth. 对…感兴奋 如：
I am / get excited about going to Beijing.===
I am excited to go to Beijing. 我对去北京感到兴奋。
27. ① end up doing sth 终止做某事，结束做某事 如：
The party ended up singing. 晚会以唱歌而结束。
② end up with sth. 以…结束 如：
The party ended up with her singing. 晚会以她的歌唱而告终。
28. first of all 首先
. to begin with 一开始
later on 后来、随
29. also 也、而且（用于肯定句）常在句子的中间
either 也（用于否定句）常在句末
too 也 (用于肯定句) 常在句末=as well
30. make mistakes 犯错
mistake sb. for …把……错认为……
make mistakes (in) doing sth. 在干某事方面出错
by mistake 错误地；由于搞错
mistake---mistook----mistaken
如：I often make mistakes. 我经常犯错。
I mistook him for his brother.我错把他认成了他的哥哥。
make a mistake 犯一个错误 如： I have made a mistake.
我已经犯了一个错误。
31. laugh at sb. 笑话；取笑（某人）
如：Don’t laugh at me!不要取笑我!
32. take notes 做笔记，做记录
33. enjoy doing sth . 喜欢做…乐意做… 如：
She enjoys playing football. 她喜欢踢足球。
enjoy oneself 过得愉快 如：He enjoyed himself. 他过得愉快。
34. native speaker 说本族语的人
35. one of +(the+ 形容词比较级)+名词复数形式 …其中之一
如： She is one of the most popular teachers. 她是最受欢迎的教师之一。
36. It’s +形容词+(for sb. ) to do sth. (对于某人来说)做某事…
如：It’s difficult (for me ) to study English.对于我来说学习英语太难了。
句中的it 是形式主语，真正的主语是to study English
37. practice doing 练习做某事 如：
She often practice speaking English. 她经常练习说英语。
38. decide to do sth. 决定做某事 如：
LiLei has decided to go to BeiJing . 李雷已经决定去北京。
39. deal with 处理 如：I dealt with a lot of problem.
40. worry about sb./ sth. 担心某人/ 某事
如：Mother worried about his son just now. 妈妈刚才担心他的儿子。
41. be angry with sb. 对某人生气 如：
I was angry with her. 我对她生气。
42. perhaps === maybe 也许
43. go by (时间) 过去 如： Two years went by. 两年过去了。
44. see sb. / sth. doing 看见某人正在做某事 强调正在发生
see sb. / sth. do 看见某人在做某事 如：
如： She saw him drawing a picture in the classroom.她看见他正在教室里画画。
45. each other 彼此
46. regard… as … 把…看作为…. 如：
The boys regarded Anna as a fool. 这些男孩把安娜看成傻瓜。
47. too many 许多 修饰可数名词 如：too many girls
too much 许多 修饰不可数名词 如：too much milk
much too 太 修饰形容词 如：much too beautiful
48. change… into… 将…变为…
如：The magician changed the pen into a book. 这个魔术师将这本书变为一本书。
49. with the help of sb. == with one’s help 在某人的帮助下
如：with the help of LiLei == with LiLei’s help 在李雷的帮助下
50. compare … to … 把…与…相比
如：Compare you to Anna, you are lucky.你和安娜相比，你是幸运的。
二、短语：
1.by making flashcards 通过做单词抽认卡
2. ask…for help 向某人求助
3.read aloud 朗读
4.that way (=in that way) 通过那种方式
5.improve my speaking skills 提高我的会话技巧
6.for example (=for instance)例如
7.have fun 玩得高兴
8.have conversations with friends 与朋友对话
9.get excited 高兴，激动
10.end up speaking in Chinese 以说汉语结束对话
11.do a survey about… 做有关…的调查
12.keep an English notebook 记英语笔记
13.spoken English (= oral English) 英语口语
14.make mistakes 犯错误
15.get the pronunciation right 使发音准确
16.practise speaking English 练习说英语
17.first of all 首先
18.begin with 以…开始
19.later on随后
20.in class在课堂上
21.laught at 嘲笑
22.take notes 记笔记
23.enjoy doing 喜欢干…
24.write down 写下，记下
25.look up (v + adv) 查找，查询
26.native speakers 说本族话的人
27.make up 编造，虚构，化妆，打扮
28.around the world 全世界
29.deal with 对待，处理，解决
30.worry about (be worried about) 担心，担忧
31.be angry with 生某人的气
32.stay angry 生气
33.go by 消逝
34. regard…as… 把…当做…
35.complain about/of 抱怨
36. change…into… 把…变成… （= turn into）
37.with the help of 在…的帮助下
38. compare…to (with)… 把…和…作比较
39.think of (think about) 想起，想到
40.physical problems身体上的问题
41.break off 中断，突然终止
42. not…at all 根本不，全然不
三、句子
1.How do you study for a test? 你怎样为考试做准备？
2.I have learned a lot that way. 用那种方法，我已经学到了很多东西。
3.It’s too hard to understand the voice. 听懂那些声音太难了。
4.Memorizing the words of pop songs also helped a little.
记流行歌曲的词也起作用。
5. Wei Ming feels differently. 卫明有不同的感受。
6.He finds watching movies frustrating. 他觉得看电影让人感到沮丧.
7.She added that having conversations with friends was not helpful at all.
她又说和朋友对话根本没用。
8.I don’t have a partner to practice English with.
我没有搭档一起练习英语。
9.Later on, I realized that it doesn’t matter if you don’t understand every word.随后，我认识到听不懂每个词并没有关系。
10.It’s amazing how much this helped. 我惊异于这些方法竟如此有用。
11.My teacher is very impressed. 给老师留下了深刻的印象。
12.She had trouble making complete sentences. 她很难造出完整的句子。
13.What do you think you are doing? 你在做什么？
14.Most people speak English as a second language.
英语对于大多数人来说是第二语言。
15.How do we deal with our problem? 我们怎样处理我们的问题？
16.It is our duty to try our best to deal with each challenge in our education with the help of our teachers. 在老师的帮助下尽我们最大的努力来应对挑战是我们的责任。
He can’t walk or even speak.他无法走路，甚至无法说话
Unit 2
一、知识点
1. used to 过去常常做某事,暗指现在已经不存在的动作或状态. 后跟动词原形. used to do sth.
There used to be ….（反意疑问句）didn’t there?
否定形式为: didn’t use to 或 usedn’t to
疑问形式为: Did…use to…? 或 Used…to…?
be/get used to doing sth.习惯于, to 为介词.
2. wear 表示状态. =be in +颜色的词
put on 表示动作.
dress + 人 给某人穿衣服.dress sb. / oneself
have on表示状态（不用于进行时态）
3. on the swim team on 是…的成员,在…供职.
4. Don’t you remember me? 否定疑问句.（考点）
Yes, I do. 不, 我记得. No, I don’t 是的, 我不记得了.
5. 反意疑问句:
① 陈述部分的主语为 this, that, 疑问部分主语用it; 陈述部分主语用 these, those, 疑问部分用they 做主语.
例: This is a new story, isn’t it?
Those are your parents, aren’t they?
② 陈述部分是 there be 结构, 疑问部分仍用 there
例: There was a man named Paul, wasn’t there?
③ I am 后的疑问句, 用aren’t I
例: I am in Class 2, aren’t I?
④ 陈述部分与含有 not, no, never, few, little, hardly, seldom, neither, none 等词时,疑问部分用肯定.
例: Few people liked this movie, didn’t they?
但陈述句中若带有否定前缀或后缀的单词时, 这个句子仍视为肯定, 后面仍用否定.
例: Your sister is unhappy, isn’t she?
⑤ 陈述部分的主语若为不定式或 V-ing 短语, 疑问部分主语用it.
例: To spend so much money on clothes is unnecessary, isn’t it?
⑥ 陈述句中主语是 nobody, no one, everyone, everybody 等指人的不定代词时,疑问部分用they做主语; 若陈述部分主语是 something, anything, noting, everything 等指事物的不定代词时, 疑问部分用it 做主语.
例: Nobody says one word about the accident, do they?
Everything seems perfect, doesn’t it?
⑦ 当主语是第一人称I时, 若谓动为think, believe, guess 等词时, 且其后跟宾丛,这时疑问句部分的人称, 时态要与宾语从句保持一致, 同时还要考虑否定转移.
例: I don’t think he can finish the work in time, can he?
⑧ 前面是祈使句, 后用 will you? (let’s 开头时, 后用shall we?)
6. be terrified of 害怕的程度比 be afraid of 深.
7. miss: ① 思念, 想念 例: I really miss the old days.
② 错过, 未中, 未赶上, 未找到.
例: It’s a pity that you miss the bus.
The boy shot at the goal, but missed.
8. no more (用在句中)=not…any more (用在句尾) 指次数;
no longer (用在句中)=not…any longer (用在句尾) 指时间.
9. right: ① adj. 正确的, 右边的② n. 右方, 权利③ adv. 直接地.
10. It seems that Yu Mei has changed a lot. = Yu Mei seems to have changed a lot.
11. afford + n. /pron. afford + to do 常与can, be able to 连用.
例: Can you afford a new car?
The film couldn’t afford to pay such large salaries.
12. as well as 连词, 不但…而且… 强调前者. (若引导主语, 谓动与前者在人称和数上一致
例: Living things need air and light as well as water.
生命不仅需要水, 还需要空气和阳光.
I as well as they am ready to help you.
不仅是他们, 我也愿意帮助你.
13. alone = by oneself 独自一人. lonely 孤独的, 寂寞的.
14. in the last/past + 一段时间
during the last/past + 一段时间 与现在完成时连用.
15. die (v.) dead (adj.) death (n.) dying (垂死的)
16. play the piano 弹钢琴
17. ①be/ become interested in sth. 对…感兴趣
②be interested in doing sth. 对做…感兴趣
③show great interest in 在……方面产生极大的兴趣
④a place of interest 一处名胜 some places of interest
如：He is interested in math, but he isn’t interested in speaking
English. 他对数学感兴趣，但是他对说英语不感兴趣。
⑤ interested adj. 感兴趣的，指人对某事物感兴趣，往往主语是人
⑥ interesting adj.有趣的，指某事物/某人具有趣味，主语往往是物
⑦ an interesting book / man
18. 害怕… be terrified of sth. 如：I am terrified of the dog.
be terrified of doing sth. 如：I am terrified of speaking.
19. on 副词，表示（电灯、电视、机械等）在运转中/打开，
其反义词off. with the light on 灯开着
20. walk to somewhere 步行到某处 walk to school 步行到学校
21.spend 动词，表示“花费金钱、时间”
①spend…on sth. 在某事上花费（金钱、时间）
②spend…doing sth. 花费（金钱、时间）去做某事 如：
He spends too much time on clothes. 他花费太多的时间在衣着
He spend 3 months building the bridge.他花费了三个月去建这座桥。
pay for 花费
如：I pay 10 yuan for the book. 我花了10元买这本书。
take动词 有“花费”的意思 常用的结构有：
It take(s) sb. … to do sth. 如：It takes me a day to read the book.
22. chat with sb. 与某人闲聊 如：I like to chat with him.
我喜欢和他聊天。
23. worry about sb./ sth. 担心某人/某事 worry 是动词
be worried about sb./sth. 担心某人/某事 worried 是形容词
如：Don’t worry about him. 不用担心他。
Mother is worried about her son. 妈妈担心他的儿子。
24. all the time 一直、始终
25. take sb. to + 地方 送/带某人去某个地方 如：
A person took him to the hospital. 一个人把他送到了医院。
Lui took me home. 刘把我送回了家。(home 的前面不能用to)
26. hardly adv. 几乎不、没有 hard 困难的；猛烈地
hardly ever 很少
hardly 修饰动词时，通常放在助动词、情态动词之后，实义
动词之前 助动词/情态动词＋hardly
hardly + 实义动词 如：
I can hardly understand them. 我几乎不能够明白他们。
I hardly have time to do it. 我几乎没有时间去做了。
It rains hard outside, I could hardly go out.
27. in the last few years. 在过去的几年内 常与完成时连用 如：
I have lived in China in the last few years. 在过去的几年内我在中国住。
28. be different from 与…不同
29. how to swim 怎样游泳
不定式与疑问词连用：动词不定式可以和what, which, how, where, when 等引导的疑问句连用，构成不定工短语。如：
The question is when to start. 问题是什么时候开始。
I don’t know where to go. 我不知道去哪。
30. make sb./ sth. + 形容词 make you happy
make sb./ sth. + 动词原形 make him laugh
31. move to +地方 搬到某地 如：I moved to Beijing last year.
32.It seems that +从句 看起来好像…… 如：
It seems that he has changed a lot. 看起来他好像变了许多。
33. help sb. with sth. 帮某人某事
help sb. (to ) do sth. 帮某人做某事
She helped me with English. 她帮助我学英语。
She helped me (to) study English。 她帮助我学习英语。
34. fifteen-year-old 作形容词 15岁的
fifteen-year-olds 作名词指15岁的人
fifteen years old 指年龄 15岁 如：
a fifteen-year-old boy 一个15岁的男孩
Fifteen-year-olds like to sing. 15岁的人喜欢唱歌。
I am fifteen years old . 我是15岁。
35.支付不起… can’t /couldn’t afford to do sth.
can’t / couldn’t afford sth.
如：I can’t/couldn’t afford to buy the car.
I can’t/couldn’t afford the car. 我买不起这个辆小车。
36. as + 形容词./副词＋as sb. could/can 尽某人的…能力 如：
Zhou run as fast as her could/can. 她尽她最快的能力去跑。
37. get into trouble with 遇到麻烦
38. in the end 最后
39. make a decision 下决定 下决心
40. to one’s surprise 令某人惊讶 如：
to their surprise 令他们惊讶 to LiLei’s surprise令李雷惊讶
41. take pride in sth. 以…而自豪 如：
His father always take pride in him. 他的爸爸总是以他而自豪
42. pay attention to sth. 对…注意，留心 如：
You must pay attention to your friend. 你应该多注意你的朋友。
43. be able to do sth. 能做某事 如：
She is able to do it. 她能够做到。
44. give up doing sth. 放弃做某事 如：
My father has given up smoking. 我爸爸已经放弃吸烟了。
复合句与简单句的转化：
① when ------ at the age of …
② so…that…----- too… to…. / enough to …
③ so that…------ in order to do sth.
④ because…----- because of…
⑤ if ….----- without / with…
⑥ if…----- 祈使句+ and / or + 简单句
⑦ 宾语从句----特殊疑问词+动词不定式
⑧ be afraid
be sure that +从句---- 动词不定式
be sorry
① It seems / seemed that sb….------ sb. seems / seemed to do sth.
② Sb. hopes / hoped that ….-------sb. hopes / hoped to do sth.
二、 短语
1. be more interested in 对…更感兴趣.
2. on the swim team 游泳队的队员.
3. be terrified of 害怕.
4. gym class 体操课.
5. worry about. 担心.
6. all the time 一直, 总是
7. chat with 与…闲聊
8. hardly ever 几乎从不
9. walk to school = go to school on foot
take the bus to school = go to school by bus
10. as well as 不仅…而且
11. get into trouble 遇到麻烦
12. make a decision 做出决定
13. to one’s surprise 使某人吃惊的是
14. take pride in 为…感到骄傲
15. pay attention to 留心, 注意
16. consist of 由…组成/构成. be made up of 由…组成/构成.
17. instead of 代替, 而不是
18. in the end 最后, 终于
19. play the piano 弹钢琴
三、句子
1.I used to be afraid of the dark. 我以前害怕黑暗.
2.I go to sleep with my bedroom light on. 我开着卧室的灯睡觉.
3.I used to spend a lot of time playing games with my friends. 以前我常常花很多时间和我的朋友们玩游戏.
4.I hardly ever have time for concerts. 我几乎没有时间去听音乐会.
5.My life has changed a lot in the last few years.
6.It will make you stressed out. 那会使你紧张的.
7.It seems that Yu Mei has changed a lot. 玉梅似乎变化很大.
Unit 3
一、知识点
①英语有两种语态：主动语态和补动语态
主动语态表示是动作的执行者
被动语态表示主语是动作的承受者
Cats eat fish. （主动语态）猫吃鱼。
Fish is eaten by cats. (被动语态)鱼被猫吃。
②被动语态的构成
由“助动词be ＋及物动词的过去分词”构成
助动词be 有人称、数和时态的变化，其变化规则与be 作为连系动词时完全一样。
时态
被动语态结构
例句
一般现在 时
am
are +过去分词
is
English is spoken in many countries.
一般过去 时
was +过去分词
were + 过去分词
This bridge was built in 1989.
情 态
动 词
can/should
may +be+过去分词
must/……
The work must be done right now.
③被动语态的用法
当我们不知道谁是动作的执行者，或者没有必要指出谁是动作的执行者，或者只需强调动作的承受者时，要用被动语态。
2. allow sb. to do sth. 允许某人做某事（主动语态）如：
Mother allows me to watch TV every night. 妈妈允许我每晚看电视。
be allowed to do sth. 被允许做某事（被动语态）如：
LiLy is allowed to go to Qinzhou. 莉莉被允许去钦州。
3. get their ears pierced 穿耳洞
让/使（别人）做某事 get sth. done(过去分词)
have sth. done 如：
I get my car repaired. == I have my car repaired. 我让别人修好我的车
I want to have my hair cut. 我要理发.
4. enough 足够
形容词＋enough 如：beautiful enough 足够漂亮
enough＋名词 如：enough food 足够食物
enough to 足够…去做… 如：
I have enough money to go to Beijing. 我有足够的钱去北京。
She is old enough to go to school.她够大去读书了。
5. stop doing sth. 停止做某事 Please stop speaking.请停止说话。
stop to do sth. 停止下来去做某事 Please stop to speak. 请停下来说话。
6. 看起来好像…sb. seem to do sth. = It seems that +从句
He seems to feel very sad.
It seems that he feels very sad. 他看起来好像很伤心。
7.倒装句:
由so＋助动词(be/do/will/have)/情态动词＋主语 意为：…也是一样
Neither/Nor + be动词/助动词/情态动词+主语(前为否定) 表示与前面所述事实一致.
She is a student. So am I. 她是一个学生，我也是。
She went to school just now. So did I . 她刚才去学校了，我也是
She has finished the work. So have I . 她已经完成了工作,我也完成了。
She will go to school. So will he. 她将去学校，他也是。
Tom can’t swim. Neither can John.
8. yet 仍然，还 常用在否定句或疑问句当中 可与although/though连用
9. stay up 熬夜如：I often stay up until 12:00pm.我经常熬夜到12点。
10. clean up 打扫 整理 如：
I have cleaned up the bedroom. 我已经打扫完了卧室。
11. 程度副词：
always总是 usually经常 sometimes有时 never从不
如：I am always/usually/sometimes/never late for school.
我总是/经常/有时/从不上学迟到。
12. 曾经做某事：
Do you ever get to school late? Yes, I do. No, I don’t.
Have you ever got to school late? Yes, I have. No, I haven’t.
13. go shopping(去购物), go fishing(去钓鱼)
go swimming(去游泳), go boating(去划船)
go hiking(去登山), go trekking(去徒步)
14. .be strict with+人. be strict in+事物.
例: The head teacher is strict with his students
He is strict in the work.
15. take the test 参加考试
pass the test 通过考试 fail a test 考试失败
16. the other day前几天,不久前的一天.(用于过去时)
every other day = every two days 每隔一天 （每两天）
17. agree 同意 反义词 disagree不同意 动词
agreement 同意 反义词 disagreement 不同意 名词
18. keep sb/ sth. ＋形容词 使某人/某物保持…. 如：
We should keep our city clean.（cleaningⅹ）我们应该保持我们的城市干净。
Don’t keep me waiting for a long time.别让我等得太久。
19. both…and… +动词复数形式
如： Both Jim and Li Ming play bastketball.
20. learn (sth.) from sb. 向谁学习(什么) 如：
Jim learnt English from his English teacher. 吉姆向他的英语老师学习英语
21. have an opportunity to do sth. 有机会做某事
have a chance of doing sth. 有机会做某事
如：I have an opportunity to go to Beijing. I have a chance of going to Beijing.
22. at present 目前
23. at least 最少 at most 最多
24. 花费 take ,cost, spend , pay
It take (sb.) time to do sth. It took (me) 10days to read the book.
sth. cost (sb.) …… The book cost (me) 100yuan.
sb. spend … on sth. She spent 10days on this book.
sb. spend …doing sth. She spent 10days reading this book.
sb. pay … for sth. She paid 10yuan for this book.
25. have +时间段+off 放假，休息 如：have 2 days off
off 不工作,不上班,不上学,不值班.
例: I think I’ll take the afternoon off. 我想下午歇班.
She is off today. 她今天休息.
I have three days off next week. 下周我有三天假.
They haven’t had a day off since last week. 从上周来,他们没休息过一天.
26. reply to 答复某人 如：She replayed to MrGreen.
27. agree with sth. 同意某事 如：I agree with that idea.
agree to sb. 同意某人的意见 如：I agree to LiLei.
28. get in the way of 碍事，妨碍 如：
Her social life got in the way of her studies. 她的社会生活妨碍了她的学习。
29. success n. succeed v. successful adj. successfully adv.
30. think about 与think of 的区别
①当两者译为： 认为、想起、记着时，两者可互用
I often think about/ of that day. 我经常想起那天。
②think about 还有“考虑”之意 ，think of 想到、想出时两者不能互用
At last, he thought of a good idea. 最后他想出了一个好主意。
We are thinking about going Qinzhou. 我们正在考虑去钦州。
31. 对… 热衷， 对…兴趣
be serious about doing 如：She is serious about dancing. 她对跳舞热衷。
be serious about sth. 如：She is serious about him. 她对他感兴趣。
32. practice doing 练习做某事 She often practice speaking English.
33. care about sb. 关心某人 如：Mother often care about her son.
34. also 也 用于句中
either也 用于否定句且用于句末
too=as well 也 用于肯定句且用于句末
I am also a student. 我也是一个学生
I am a student too. 我也是一个学生。
I am not a student either. 我也不是一个学生。
35.allow sb to do sth 允许某人做… allow doing sth 允许做…
36.stupid silly foolish 三个词都有“蠢”的意思.但略有不同.stupid 程度最强,指智力 理解力 学习能力差. silly 指头脑简单,傻头傻脑,使人觉得可笑,带有感情色彩. foolish 尤其在口语中广泛使用.
例: He is stupid in learning math. 他学习数学很笨.
Stop asking such silly questions. 别再问这样傻的问题了.
You are foolish to throw away such a good chance.
你真蠢,丢掉这样一个好机会.
37.He doesn’t seem to have many friends.
=It seems that he doesn’t have many friends.
=He seems not to have many friends.
38.clean (v.) 打扫,清理
clean up 比较彻底地打扫,清理 clean out 打扫,清理地最彻底.
39.concentrate on… 全神贯注做…
例: He decided to concentrate on physics because he failed the exam.
This company concentrates on China market.
这家公司把重点放在中国市场上.
40. more…than…①与其说…不如说…; 比…更…
例: The man is more stupid than nervous.
与其说那人紧张,倒不如说他愚蠢.
②在这一结构中,more做adj. 修饰名词,表示“比…多”
例:I have more books than you. 我的书比你的多.
41.volunteer ① n. 自愿者. ② v. volunteer to do sth. 自愿做…
例: We all volunteered to help in the old people’s home.
我们都志愿到敬老院帮忙.
42. get in the way (of)... 妨碍...
例: He never gets in others’ way. 他从不妨碍别人.
The bikes over there will get in the way of others. 自行车放在那里会妨碍别人的.
43. success (n.) successful (adj.) succeed (v.)
44. only 处于句首,并后跟状语时,全句需要倒装.
例: Only then did he understand it. 只有到那时,他才明白.
Only in this way can we learn English well. 只有这样我们才能把英语学好.
Only when she came home, did he learn the news. 当她到家时,他才得知了这消息.
45. care about 关心,在乎,在意.
例: No one cares about others nowadays. 现在没人关心别人.
I don’t care about what he does. 我并不在意他干什么.
二、短语
1. be allowed to do sth 被允许干…
allow sb to do sth 允许某人干…
allow doing sth 允许干…
2. sixteen-year-olds = sixteen-year-old boys and girls 16岁的孩子
3. part-time jobs 兼职工作
4. a driver’s license 驾照
5. on weekends 在周末
6. at that age 在那个年龄段
7. on school nights 在上学期间的每个晚上
8. stay up 熬夜
9. clean up (相当与及物动词) 清扫
10. fail (in) a test 考试不及格
11. take the test 参加考试
12. the other day 前几天
13. all my classmates 我所有的同学
14. concentrate on 全神贯注于
15. be good for 对…有益
16. in groups 成群的,按组的
17. get noisy 吵闹(系表结构)
18. learn from 向某人学习
19. at present 目前,现在
20. have an opportunity to do sth 有做…的机会
21.English-English dictionary 英英词典
22. at least 至少
23.eight hours’ sleep a night 每晚8小时的睡眠
24. an old people’s home 敬老院
25. take time to do sth 花费时间干…
26. primary schools 小学
27. have…off 放假,休息
28. reply to 回答,答复
29. get in the way of 妨碍
30. a professional athlete 职业运动员
31. achieve one’s dreams 实现梦想
32. think about 思考,考虑
33. in the end 最后,终于
34. be serious about 对…热忠/极感兴趣
35. spend…on + n. spend …(in) + v-ing 在…上花费时间/金钱
36. care about 关心,担心,在乎
37. agree with 同意…
三.句子
1. I don’t think twelve-year-olds should be allowed to get their ears pierced.
我认为不应该允许12岁的孩子穿耳孔.
2.They talk instead of doing homework. 他们聊天而不是做作业.
3.He is allowed to stay up until 11:00 pm. 允许他们熬到晚上11点.
4.We should be allowed to take time to do things like that more often.
我们应该被允许更加经常的花些时间多做这类事情.
5.What school rules do you think should be changed?
你认为学校的哪些制度应该改一改了?
6.The two pairs of jeans both look good on me.
这两条牛仔裤穿在我身上都适合.
7.The classroom is a real mess. 教室太脏了.
8.Should I be allowed to make my own decisions?
9.Only then will I have a chance of achieving my dream.
只有这样我才能实现我的梦想.
10.They should be allowed to practice their hobbies as much as they want.
应该允许他们对业余爱好想练多长时间就练多长时间.
11.We have nothing against running. 我们没有理由反对他跑步.
Unit 4
一、知识点
1. if 引导的非真实性条件状语从句 即 虚拟语气
通过动词形式的变化来表示说话人对发生的动作或存在的状态
所持的态度或看法的动词形式称为语气，虚拟语气表示说话人所说的
话不是事实，而是一种祝愿，建议或是与事实相反的假设等。
If 引导的条件状语从句分为真实和非真实条件句，非真实条件
句应用虚拟语气。如果要表示与现在或将来事实相反时，其虚拟语气结构为：
句 型
条件从句
主 句
谓语动词形式
动词过去式(be动词一律用were)
would+动词原形
即：(从句)if +主语+动词过去式(be 动词用were), 一般过去时
(主句) 主语+would+动词原形 过去将来时
如：If I had time, I would go for a walk.
如果我有时间，我就会去散步。(事实上我现在没有时间)
If I were you, I would take an umbrella.
假如我是你的话，我会带上雨伞。(事实上我不是你)
I would say no if someone asked me to be in a movie.
假如有人请我当电影演员，我会表示拒绝。(事实上瑞没有人请我当电影演员)
2. pretend to do sth. 假装做某事 I pretended to sleep just now.
pretend to be doing sth. 假装正在干某事
The students pretended to be writing when the teacher came in.
pretend +从句 假装… I pretended that I fell asleep.
3. be late for 迟到 如：
I am late for work/ school/ class/ party.
4. a few 与 a little 的区别，few 与 little 的区别
⑴ a few 一些 修饰可数名词
a little 一些 修饰不可数名词 两者表肯定意义
如：He has a few friends. 他有一些朋友。
There is a little sugar in the bottle. 在瓶子里有一些糖。
⑵ few 少数的 修饰可数名词
little 少数的 修饰不可数名词 但两者表否定意义
如：He has few friends. 他没有几个朋友。
There is little sugar in the bottle.在瓶子里没有多少糖。
5. hundred, thousand , million, billion (十亿)词前面有数词或several
一词时要不能加s ，反之，则要加s 并与of 连用， 表示数量很
多 如：several hundred/ thousand/ million/ billion people
几百/千/百万/十亿人 hundreds of trees 上百棵树
8. what if + 从句 如果…怎么办 ， 要是… 又怎么样 如：
What if she doesn’t come? 要是她不来怎么办？
What if LiLei knows? 如果李雷知道了怎么办？
9. add sth. to sth. 添加…到…
如： I added some sugar to water. 我把糖添加到水里。
10. 系动词与形容词连用 get nervous 变得紧张
feel shy 觉得害羞 look friendly 看起来友好
11. too +形/副+to do sth. 太…而不能 如：
I’m too tired to stand. 我太累了而不能站。
12. help with sth. 如：They help with this problem.
help sb. do. 如：They help you relax. 他们帮助你放松
13. in public 在公共场所 如:
Don’t smoke in public. 请不要在公共场所吸烟。
14. energetic adj. 活力的 如：She is a energetic girl. 她是一个活力的女孩。
energy n. 活力 如：She has lots of energies. 她有活力。
15. ask sb. to do 叫…做某事
ask sb. not to do sth.叫…不要做某事
tell sb. to do 告诉…做某事
tell sb. not to do sth. 告诉…不要做某事
如：Teacher asked me to clean the classroom.
Teacher asked me not to clean the classroom.
16. start doing == start to do. 开始做某事 如：
He started speaking/ to speak. 他开始说话。
17. borrow sth. from sb. 从某人那里借来某物 如：
I borrowed a book from Lily. 我从莉莉那里借来一本书。
18.wait for sb.等某人 如：I am wait for him. 我正在等他。
19. introduce sb. to sb. 把某人介绍给某人 如：
I introduced Lily to Anna. 我把莉莉介绍给安娜。
20. invite sb. to do 邀请某人做某事 如：
Lily invited me to go to her home for supper. 莉莉邀请我去她家吃晚饭。
21. have dinner/ supper 吃晚饭
have lunch/ breakfast 吃午餐、吃早餐
22. plenty of 修饰不可数名词，也可以修饰可数名词 许多 如：
They have plenty of food/ apples. 他们有许多的食物/苹果。
23. 给某人某物 give sth. to sb. 如： give an apple to me
give sb. sth. give me an apple 给我一个苹果
24. get along (with)=get on (with)
①进行，进展
The business is getting along very well. 生意进展的很顺利。
How are you getting along with your English study?
你的英语学习进展的怎么样了？
②相处
Do you get along with your boss?= Do you and your boss get along?
你跟老板合得来吗？
I’m getting along very well with my classmates. 我和同学们相处得很好。
25. would rather … than … （= would … rather than）宁愿，而不愿。
前后连接两个动词原形，否定形式为：would rather not do sth
①would rather … than … = prefer … to …
但prefer … to … 若连接两个动词，动词应为v-ing 形式。
He would rather jog than play football.
=He prefers jogging to playing football.
②would rather 常单独使用，表示“宁愿做…”
He would rather watch TV at home.
③rather than = instead of 而不是（连接两个并列成分，前后对称）。
I’d prefer to go to in summer rather than in winter.
I decided to write rather than telephone.
I like going out with you rather than with him.
She enjoys listening rather than speaking.
25. in fact 事实上
26. let sb. down 让某人失望 如：
Don’t let your mother down. 不要让你的妈妈失望。
27. come up with sth. 提出 想出
如：He came up with a good idea. 他提出了一个好主意。
catch up with sb. 追上 赶上
如：Lily caught up with Anna. 莉莉赶上了安娜。
28. have experience doing 在做某事有经验 如：
I have experience teaching Chinese. 我在教英语方面有经验。
29. come out 出版，出来
如：The magazine comes out once a week. 这种杂志每周出一次。
30. by accident 偶然地，无意之中 如：
Last week I cut my finger by accident. 上个星期我不小心割到自己的手指。
31. hurry to do 匆忙… I hurry to call the police.
32. more than=over 超过
34. offer 提供 offer sb sth 给××……
offer to sb sth 主动提出干……
35. ①give sb sth=give sth to sb
类似的词还有:pass、lend、show、write、send等
②buy sb sth=buy sth for sb
类似的词还有:make、draw、cook等
36.look for寻找find找到、发现
find out指经过观察、探索、调查等弄清楚、弄明白。
discover 指发现那些客观存在而不为人所知的实情。如科学上的重大发现。
37.bring 带来 take 带走 fetch 去并拿来
38.talk to/with sb 同××说话。
tell 告诉, 分辨，辨别。
speak to sb 同××说话，做及物动词，后跟语言。
say 后跟名词、代词及宾语从句做宾语，着重强调说话内容。
39.What if …… 如果……将会怎么样？（引导条件状语从句、疑问句）
What if she doesn’t come? 她要是不来怎么办？
What if your parent don’t agree? 如果你的父母不同意怎么办？
What if you should fall sick? 如果你生病了怎么办？
40.What does/do ×× look like? 问相貌。
What’s ×× like? 问“品质性格”。
41.give a speech 做演讲 have a speech听演讲 give a report 做报告
have a report 听报告
42.permission (n.) 允许，许可 permit (v.) 允许
without permission 未经许可
43.plenty of 充足的，相当多的。修饰可数或不可数名词，只能用于肯定句。否定、疑问句中用 enough.
44.not……in the slightest=not……at all 根本不
45.a little = a bit 修饰形容词、副词 a little = a bit of 修饰不可数名词
46.the rest 其余的，可指代可数或不可数名词。The other(s) 只能指代可数名词
宾语从句 ：宾语从句在复合句中作主句的宾语。
由连接词+ 主语+ 谓语 构成
常由下面的一些词引导：
㈠由that 引导 表示陈述意义 that 可省略
He says (that) he is at home. 他说他在家里。
㈡由if , whether 引导 表示 一般疑问意义(带有是否、已否、对否等)
I don’t know if / whether Wei Hua likes fish. 我不知道韦华是否喜欢鱼。
㈢由 连接代词、连接副词(疑问词) 引导 表示特殊疑问意义
Do you know what he wants to buy? 你知道他想要买什么吗？
㈣从句时态要与主句一致
当主句是一般现在时，从句根据情况使用任何时态
He says (that ) he is at home. 他说他在家里。
I don’t know (that) she is singing now. 我不知道她正在唱歌。
She wants to know if I have finished my homework.
她想要知道我是否已经完成了我的作业。
Do you know when he will be back? 你知道他将会什么时候回来？
当主句是一般过去时，从句应使用过去某时态(一般过去时,过去进行时，过去将来时，过去完成时)
He said (that) he was at home. 他说他在家里。
I didn’t know that she was singing now. 我不知道她正在唱歌。
She wanted to know if I had finished m homework.
她想要知道我是否已经完成了我的作业。
Did you know when he would be back? 你知道他将会什么时候回来？
二、短语
1、give it to charity 把它捐给慈善机构
2、medical research 医学研究
3、What if …… 如果…怎么样？
4、get nervous 紧张
5、take a big exam 参加大考
6、help with 有助于
7、in public 在公共场合
8、hardly ever 几乎不
9、the whole school 全校
10、without permission 为经许可
11、be(make) friends with 与…交朋友
12、ask one’s permission 请求××的允许
13、introduce…to… 把…介绍给…
14、invite…to do… 邀请…干…
15、social situations 社会环境
16、not… in the slightest 根本不，一点也不
17、right away 立刻，马上
18、all day 全天
19、be friendly to 对…友好
20、at lunch time 在午饭时间
21、a bit shy 有点害羞
22、English speech contest 英语演讲比赛
23、represent the class 代表班级
24、come top 名列第一（前茅）
25、let … down 使…失望
26、come up with 提出、想出
27、be sure of + n./pron.
be sure to do 相信… be sure +that 从句
28、the rest of the students 其余的学生
29、have a lot of experience (in) doing sth 在做某事方面有经验
30、deal with 对付，处理
31、come out 出版
32、give advice on… 在…方面提出意见、建议
33、by accident 偶然地，无意之中
34、hurry to do sth 匆匆忙忙干…
35、an internet friend 网友
三、句子
1.He doesn’t know if he should bring a present. 他不知道是否该带礼物。
2.You shouldn’t worry about what other people say.
你不应该考虑别人说什么。
3.What will you do if you had a million dollars?
如果你有一百万美元，你会干什么？
4.If I were you, I ‘d take a small present.
如果我是你，我会带一个小礼物。
5.I’m too tired to do well.我太累了，没考好。
6.Dogs can be a lot of trouble.狗会带来很多麻烦。
7.What are you like? 你是什么样的人？
8.I’d invite him/her to have dinner at my house.
我会邀请他（她）到我家吃饭。
9.You enjoy the company of other people.你喜欢别人的陪伴。
10. I feel nervous talking in front of many people.
我在众人面前讲话时感到紧张。
11.She always comes top in the school exams.
她在学校的考试中总是名列前茅。
12.She doesn’t want to let her friends down.她不愿让朋友失望。
13.If I were you, I’ll get out of here.如果我是你，我会离开这里。
虚拟语气
一、词的语气
指我们平常说的说话人说话的口气。（在英语中，语气除了指语调以外，最主要的是通过动词发生变化而表示不同语气）
英语中的语气分为三类：
陈述语气（用于陈述句、疑问句、感叹句）
祈使语气（用于祈使句）
虚拟语气（用于条件状语从句、宾语从句等）
二、虚拟语气
如果所说的不是事实，而是一种假设、愿望、建议或是一种实现不了的空想，就用虚拟语气。
三、虚拟语气在非真实条件状语从句中的用法
1、真实条件状语从句与非真实条件状语从句
eg If he doesn’t hurry up, he will miss the bus.( 真实条件状语)
If he was free, he asked me to tell stories.（真实条件状语）
If I were you, I would go at once.（非真实条件状语从句）
If there was no air, people would die.（非真实条件状语从句）
2、虚拟语气在非真实条件状语从句中的用法及动词形式
① 表示与现在事实相反的情况
If I were you, I’d take an umbrella.如果我是你，我会带把伞。
If I knew his telephone number, I would tell you.
如果我知道他的电话号码，我就会告诉你。（事实：不知道）
If there were no air or water, there would be no living things on the earth.
如果没有水和空气，地球上就不会有生物。(事实：地球上既有空气也有水)
If I had any money with me, I could lend you some.
如果我带钱了，我就会借给你些。（事实：没带钱）
If he studied harder, he might pass the exam.如果他在努力些，就能通过考试了。（事实：学习不用功）
②表示与过去事实相反的情况
从句谓语动词形式
主句谓语动词形式
Had+过去分词
Should/would/could/might+have+过去分词
从句
例句
主句
①were
If+主语 ② did
③were to do
(①通常与一个表示时间状语连用)其 中were to do可能性最小，
should+动词原形。
If it rained tomorrow our picnic
would be put off.
假如那天下雨，我们的郊游就推迟。
主句+should/would /might /could+动词原形
（条件）从句谓语动词形式
主句谓语动词形式
谓语动词用过去式（be用were）
should/would/could/might+动词原形
eg If I had got there earlier, I should/could have met her.
如果我早到那儿，我就会见到她。（事实：去晚了）
If he had taken my advice, he would not have made such a mistake.
如果他听我的劝告的话，就不会犯这样的错误了。（事实：没有听我的话）
③表示对将来情况的主观推测（可能相反或可能性很小）
eg: If he would come here tomorrow, I should/would talk to him.
如果他哪天来这儿的话，我就跟他谈谈。（事实：来的可能性很小）
If there were a heavy snow next Sunday, we would not go skating.
如果下周日下大雪，我们就不能去滑冰了，（事实：不知能否下雪）
If she were to be there next Monday, I would tell her about the matter.
如果她下周一来这儿的话，我就会告诉她这件事得始末。
四、虚拟语气的其他用法
1、虚拟语气用在wish 后的宾语从句
a、表示与现在事实相反的愿望，谓语动词用过去式
eg: I wish I had your brains.我希望我有你那样的头脑。(事实：我根本比不上你)
b、表示过去事实相反的愿望，谓语动词：had+v-ed
eg: I wish I had known the truth of the matter.我希望我原来知道这件事的真相。（事实：原来不知道）
c、表示将来难以实现的愿望
谓语动词：should/would + 动词原形
eg: I wish I should have a chance again.很难再有这样的机会了。（事实：很难再有这样的机会了）
②虚拟语气用在suggest(建议)、insist(坚持)、demand(要求)、order(命令)等动词后的宾语从句中。
在这种用法中，无论主句谓语动词为何种时态，从句的谓语动词都用：“should + 动
词原形”或只用“动词原形”。
如 He suggested
He insisted
He demand that we (should) take the teacher’s advice
He ordered
Unit 5
一、知识点：
1.情态动词must, may , might, could, may , can’t表示推测含义与用法后面都接动词原形，都可以表示对现在情况的揣测和推断但他们
含义有所不同
must 一定 肯定 (100%的可能性)
may, might, could有可能，也许 (20%－80%的可能性)
can’t 不可能，不会 (可能性几乎为零)
The dictionary must be mine. It has my name on it.
The CD might/could/may belong to Tony because
he likes listening to pop music.
The hair band can’t be Bob’s. After all, he is boy!
2. whose 谁的 疑问词 作定语 后面接名词
如：Whose book is this? This is Lily’s.
3. belong to 属于 如：
That English book belongs to me.（不能用名词性的物主代词）
4. 当play 指弹奏乐器时，常在乐器前用定冠词 如：
play the guitar play the piano play the violin
当play 指进行球类运动时，则不用定冠词 如：
play football play basketball play baseball
5. if引导的条件状语从句，主句用一般将来时，
从句用一般现在时代替将来时 如：
If you don’t hurry up, you’ll be late.如果你不快点，你将会迟到
6. if you have any idea== if you know 如果你知道
7. on 关于（学术，科目）
8. try to do sth. 尝试做某事 如：
I try to climb the tree. 我尝试爬树。
9. because of , because
because of + 名词/代词/名词性短语
because + 从句 如：
I do it because I like it. 我做这件事是因为我喜欢。
I had to move because of my job. 因为工作的原因我得搬家。
10. own v.－owner n. listen v.－listener n. learn v.－learner n.
11. catch a bus 赶公车
12. neighbor 邻居 指人
neighborhood 邻居 指地区也可指附近地区的人
13. local 当地的 如：local teacher 当地的教师
14. noise n. 噪音 是个可数名词 noises
15. call the police 报警 如：Quick! Call the police! 快！叫警察！
16. anything strange 一些奇怪的东西
当形容词修饰something, anything, nothing, everything等不定代词时，放在这些词的后面
17. there be sb./ sth. doing 如：
There is a cat eating fish.
There must be something visiting our home.
18. escape from …从哪里逃跑出来 如：
He escaped from the burning building. 他从燃烧的大概中逃出来。
19. an ocean of + 名词 极多的，用不尽的 如：an ocean of energy.
20. unhappy 不高兴的 反义词 happy 高兴的
21. final adj. 最后的 finally adv. 最后地
22. dishonest 不诚实的 反义词 honest 诚实的。
23. get on 上车 get off 下车
24. use up 用光、用完 如：They have used up all the money.
他们已经用完了所有的钱。
25. attempt to do 试图 如：
The boys attempted to leave for Beijing. 男孩子们试图想去北京。
26. wake 动词 唤醒 常用的词组：wake up 意为醒来 如：
Please wake me up at 8 o’clock. 请在8点钟叫醒我。
27. look for 寻找 指过程
find 找 指结果 如：
I am looking for a pen. 我正在找一支笔。（指找的过程）
I found my pen just now. 我刚刚找到了我的笔。（指找的结果）
28. hear 听 指听的结果
listen 听 指听的过程 如：
Did you hear ? 你听到了吗？（指听的结果，听或没听到）
I often listen to the music. 我经常听音乐。（指听的过程）
29. try one’s best to do sth. 尽某人的最大努力去做某事 如：
He tried his best to run. 他尽他的最大努力去跑。
30. 名词所有格
名词所有格的构成有两种形式
①是在名词后面加 ’s 或是以s结尾 的名词，只在名词的后面加 ’
如：Ann’s book 安的书, our teachers’ office我们老师们的办公室
注：双方共有的所有格，只在后面一个名词加’s, 如：
Lily and Lucy’s father 莉莉和露西的爸爸（她们的爸爸是同一个人）
②有…of …介词短语表示无生命东西的所有格 如：
a picture of my family 我家人的相片
有时也有’s表示无生命的东西的所有格 如：
today’s newspaper, the city’s name
31、happen指偶然的发生；
take place用于计划好的事情或自然的发生；（二者无被动语态）
happen to do sth碰巧干某事. happen to sb.某人发生了什么事
32、raise [reiz] 及物动词 举起、提高 ；募捐 用外力升起，如升旗
rise（不及物动词）上升。自然升起，如价格上涨，日出等。
Raise the money for charity. Raise the Five-red-star flag
33、hope to do sth；hope that从句。
wish to do sth；wish sb to do sth；wish that从句。
34、however与but：
（1）从语义上看，but所表示的是很明显的对比、转折。
（2）从语法上看，but是并列连词，however是个副词。
（3）从语序上看，but总位于所引导的句首，however可放在句首、句中、句尾。
（4）从标点上看，but之后没有逗号，however之前、之后短语用逗号隔开。
在完成时态
⑴由have/ has ＋ 过去分词
⑵表示过去发生或已经完成的某一动作对现在造成的影响或结果
常与already, just , yet , ever, never 连用
Have you finished your work yet？你完成了你的工作了吗？
Yes, I have. I have just finished it. 是的。我刚刚完成了。
I have already finished it . 我已经完成了。
Have you ever been to China? 你曾经去过中国吗？
No, I have never been there. 没有，我从来也没有去过。
⑶①表示过去已经开始，持续到现在的动作 或状态和表示过去某一时刻延续到现在（包括现在在内）的一段时间的状态连用如：（for + 时间段，since + 时间点，或过去某一动作， 以及how long ）
②注： 非延续性动词在现在完成 时态中不能和for, since 引导的表示一段时间的状语的肯定句连用。
应转为相应的延续性动词 如：
buy---- have die---- be dead join ---- be in
borrow----- keep leave---- be away
I have bought a pen.------ I have had a pen for 2 weeks.
The dog has died.------- The dog has been dead since last week.
⑷①have (has) been to + 地点 去过某地 已经回来
②have (has) gone to + 地点 去了某地 没有回来
③have been in + 地点 一直呆在某地 没有离开过 如：
She has been to Shanghai. 她去过上海。(已经回来)
She has gone to Shanghai. 她去了上海。(没有回来)
She has been in Shanghai for 2 days.她呆上海两天了。(没有离开过上海)
二、短语：
1、be long to属于
2、listen to classical music听古典音乐
3、at school上学、求学、在学校
4、go to the concert去听音乐会
5、have any/some idea知道 have no idea不知道
6、a math test on algebra有关代数的数学考试
7、the final exam期末考试
8、because of因为
9、a present for his mother送给她妈妈的礼物
10、run for exercise跑步锻炼
11、wear a suit穿西装
12、make a movie拍电影
13、in our neighborhood在我们附近、在我们小区
14、have fun玩耍、取闹
15、his or her own idea她（他）自己的看法
16、late night深夜
17、an ocean of许许多多、无穷无尽的
18、be care of=look out当心、小心
19、pretend to do sth假装干…
20、use up用完、用光
三、句子：
1、If you have any idea where might be please call me.
如果你知道它可能在哪，请打电话给我。
2、It’s crucial that I study for it because it counts 30%to the final exam.
关键是我必须学，因为它占期末考试的30%。
3、What do you think “anxious” means?
你认为“anxious”是什么意思？
4、He could be running for exercise.他可能是跑步锻炼身体。
5、He might be running to catch a bus.他可能是在跑着赶公共汽车。
6、Why do you think the man is running?你觉得那个男的为什么跑？
7、No more mystery in Bell Tower neighborhood.
钟塔附近不再有神秘的事了。
Unit 6
一、 知识点
1.prefer v.更喜爱，更喜欢，相当于like……better，其过去式、过去分词为preferred，常用于以下结构：
(1)prefer+名词、代词I preferred music. Which do you prefer?
(2)prefer+动词不定式“宁愿干……”
She prefers to live among the working people.
(3) prefer+v-ing I prefer living abroad.
(4)prefer+动词不定式复合结构:
常见的搭配有:
①prefer……to……喜欢……而不喜欢……（to为介词）
She prefers apples to bananas.
②prefer doing to doing（to为介词）
He prefers running to walking.
③prefer to do …… rather than do sth.宁愿干……而不愿干……
They prefer to play games rather than watch TV.
2.gentle: ①轻柔，温和（往往指音乐、嗓音或风）
②温柔的，文雅的（往往指人的性格）
3.remind……of……使某人回想起或意识到某人、某事
She reminded me of her sister.
The pictures remind me of my school days.
4.表示“也”的用法：
also 用在句中，too 用在句末，as well 多用于口语，用在句末，这三个表达都用在肯定句。either “也” 用在否定句尾
5. What do you think of …? =How do you like…?
6.as 的用法：
①用作连词“按照”
Please do it again as I told you.
②连词，当……的时候，着重强调两个动词同时发生
She sang as she worked.
③表示原因，“因为，由于”比较口语化，语气也较弱，所表示的原因比较明显。
As I didn’t know the way, I asked the policeman.
④as…as… 和……一样
7.over the years多年来 ，往往与现在完成时连用
8.though 不做副词“可是，不过，然而”放在句尾
9. be sure of +n. / pron. /短语
be sure that 从句 ｝相信，对……有把握
be sure to do 务必……一定……
make sure 确保，核实，查收，弄清楚
10.one of the+最高级+复数名词，最……之一
11.过去分词作定语，表示被动或完成
12. on display=on show
13.interest:①n.兴趣，趣味；②v.使感兴趣
He interested me in football.他使我对足球感兴趣。
I’ve got a lot of books that might interest you.我有许多可能使你感兴趣的书。
14.class 等级，级别，阶级
15. whatever=no matter what
16.suggest:①建议，后跟宾语从句，用虚拟语气；
②表示，暗示，后跟宾语从句，不用虚拟语气。
17. energy (n.)=energetic (adj.)
18.honest 该词是元音发音开头，前面的不定冠词用“an”.
19.先行词若为地点或时间时，后面的关系词用关系代词还是关系副词，要看关系词在定语从句中作什么成分。若关系词作定语从句的主语、宾语或定语，用关系代词；若关系词作状语，则用关系副词。
20. along with 伴随… 同… 一道
I will go along with you. 我同你一道去。
I sing along with music. 我伴随着音乐唱歌。
21. dance to sth. 随着…跳舞
She likes dancing to the music. 她喜欢随着音乐而跳舞。
22. different kinds of 各种各样different kinds of clothes 各种各样的衣服
23. music n. 音乐 musician n. 音乐家 musical
24. take … to … 带…去…. 如：
My father often takes me to the park. 我的爸爸经常带我去公园。
Please take this box to my office. 请拿这个盒子到我的办公室。
25. be important to sb. 对…重要
be important for sb. to do. 做某事对某人很重要
26. though == although 作连词 虽然，尽管
放在句子中间/句首，不能和but 连用
Though it was very late, he went on working. 虽然很晚了，但他还在工作
Mr. Smith , though he was young, did it very well.
史密斯先生虽然年轻，却做得很好。
27. energy n. 活力 energetic adj. 有活力的
28. most of … …的大多数
29. keep healthy 保持健康
30. get together 聚在一起
31. be bad for sth. 对…有坏处的
be bad for doing sth. 做…有坏处
32. take care of === look after 照顾 关心 如：
She often takes care of / looks after her son.
33 stay away from 远离… 如：
Stay away from me , I have a cold. 请远离我，我得了感冒
34. to be honest 老实说 如：
To be honest I really like flowers. 老实说我真的很喜欢花。
35. dislike 不喜欢 反义词 like 喜欢
36. fisherman 渔夫 复数形式 fishermen
37. photography n. 摄影 photograph n. 照片 相片
photographer n. 摄影师
38. be in agreement 意见一致 常与介词on /about连用如：
They are in agreement on that question. 他们对那个问题意见一致。
39. mainly adv. 主要地 首要地 main adj. 主要的
二.短语
1.expect to do sth.期望干……
expect sb. to do sth期望某人干……
2.catch up with追上，赶上
3.different kinds of music各种不同的音乐
4.quiet and gentle songs轻柔的歌曲
5. take…to… 带……到……
6. remind…of…使某人想起或意识到……
7.her own songs她自己的歌曲
8.be important to对……重要
9.Yellow River黄河
10.Hong Tao’s latest movie洪涛最近的电影
11.over the years多年来
12.be sure to do sth.务必干……一定干……
13.one of the best known Chinese photographers世界上最有名的中国摄影家之一
14.on display展览，展出
15.come and go来来往往
16.can’t stand不能忍受
17.look for寻找
18.feel sick感到恶心，不舒服
19.have a great time玩得高兴，过得愉快
20.to be honest说实话
21.be lucky to do幸运的是……
22.my six-month English course我6个月的英语课
23.most of my friends我的大部分朋友
24.go for去找某人，想法得到某事物
25.stay healthy保持健康
26.French fries薯条
27.stay away from与……保持距离
28.be in agreement意见一致（后跟短语、句子）
29.barbecued meat烤肉
30.a tag question反意疑问句
31.be bad for对……有害
三．句子
1.I love singers who write their own music.我喜欢自己创作曲子的歌手。
2.We prefer music that has great lyrics.我们更喜欢歌词很棒的曲子。
3.What do you dislike about this CD.你不喜欢这张CD的什么？
4.What does it remind you of？它使你想起了什么？
5.The music reminds me of Brazilian dance music.这首曲子使我想起了巴西舞曲。
6.It does have a few good features, though.
然而，它的确也有一些好的方面。
7.She really has something for everyone.
每个人的确都能从她的作品中领悟到一些东西。
8.Whatever you do, don’t miss this exhibition.
无论怎样，你都不能错过这次展出。
9.As the name suggests, the band has a lot of energy.
正如乐队名字所暗示的那样，这支乐队很有活力。
10. Some people say they are boring, but others say they are great.
11.If I were you, I’d eat nuts instead.如果我是你，我会改吃坚果。
Unit7
一、知识点：
1. tired 累的 tiring 令人疲惫的
bored 讨厌 boring 令人厌烦/讨厌的
excited 兴奋的 exciting 令人兴奋/激动的
amazed 惊讶的 amazing 令人惊讶的
2. education n. 教育 educational 有教育意义的
3. 想要做…：would like to do
想要…：would like sth.
常用的句型有：
What would you like to do? 你想要做什么？
I would like to visit GuiLin. 我想去参观桂林。
What would you like ? 你想要什么？
I would like some tea. 我想来些茶。
Would you like to go to my party? 你来不来参加我的晚会？
(表邀请) Yes, I’d love/ like to . No, thanks.
Would you like some tea or coffee? 你是要点茶还是咖啡？
Yes, I’d love/ like. No. thanks.
Where would you like to visit/ go? 你想去哪呢？(本单元的重点句型)
4. go on vacation 去度假
go on a trip 去旅行
go on a picnic 去野炊
5. hope to do 希望做某事 I hope to go to Beijing. 我希望去北京。
hope (that) + 从句 希望….
I hope that I can go to Beijing.我希望我能去北京。
I hope (that) she can pass the test.我希望她能通过考试。
6. I love places where the people are friendly. 我喜欢人们友好的地方。
where 关系副词，引导定语从句
where引导定语从句修饰表示地点的先行词如：the place, the city等
That is the school where I studied 10 years ago. 那就是我10年前所就读的学校。
7. 不定代词 参看课本P141
注：形容词必须放在不定代词、不定副词的后面
8. consider doing考虑做某事
I am considering changing my job. 我正在考虑换工作。
9. cost (sb.) 钱、时间 The book cost me 10 yuan 这本书花了我10元。
10. in general 一般来说， 大体上， 通常
11. be supposed to do 应该做…. === should 如：
Scientists are supposed to know a lot. 科学家们应该知道更多。
12. take a trip 去旅行
13. provide sb. with sth 供应某人某物=== provide sth for sb.
如：They provide us with water.
They provide water for us.
14. how far 问路程 多远（20 kilometers , five munites’ walk）
how old 问年龄 多少岁（13 years old）
how long 问时间 多久；多长（since, for）
how often 问频率 多久一次（sometimes, often, 3 times a day, every day）
15. be away 离开 如：
I was away 2days ago. 我两天前离开了。
I will be away for a few days. 我将离开一些天。
16. inexpensive adj. 不贵的 反义词 expensive adj. 贵的
17. let sb. do 让某人做某事 Let me help you.让我帮你吧。
let sb. not do 让某人不要做某Let us not laugh. 让我们不要笑了。
18. in the future 将来
She will a good mother in the future. 在将来她将会是一个好妈妈。
19. 用to 表示 “的”有：
answers to question 问题的答案
the key to the door 这扇门的钥匙
20. as soon as possible 尽可能的快
21. continue doing == go on doing 继续做某事 如：
She continued singing. == She went on singing. 她继续唱歌。
22. according to 根据
23. be willing to do 愿意做某事 如：
I am willing to help you. 我愿意帮你。
24. on the other hands 另一方面
25. hold on to sth. 保持，不要放弃
Please hold on to my hand. 不要放开我的手。
26. come true 实现 如：
My dream have come true. 我的梦实现了。
27．through 穿过 含有“in”的意思 across 横过 含有“on”的意思
28. Some day=someday 只指将来某一天
one day 既可指将来某一天，也可指过去某一天。
28. Plan 计划打算(1) plan to do sth
We are planning to visit London this summer /Do plan to stay late?
(2) 跟名词或者代词 Have you planned your trip?
We have been planning this visit for months.
(3) plan for 为…做计划He planned for a picnic if the next day were fine.
(4) plan on 打算有（做某事）She had not planned on so many guests.
They are planning on an/for an outing.
29.强调句型：It is(was)…that (who ,whom)…
(1) 强调句型可用来强调各种句子成分
(2) 强调句中的连词who,whom只用来指代人，that 即可以指代人也可以指代物被强调部分是时间，地点等仍用that
(3)that,whom, who 后的句中的谓语与原句保持一致
(4)强调句中只有it is ,it was 两种时态形式，
如：I am right ------It is I who(that) am right.
又如：They will have a meeting tomorrow.
It is they who(that) will have a meeting tomorrow.
It′s a meeting that they will have tomorrow.
It′s tomorrow that they will have a meeting.
30.在英语中，有although 不能有but;有because 不能有so
二 、短语
1.go on vacation 去度假
2.trek through the jungle 徒步穿越丛林
3.some day 有朝一日
4.one of the liveliest cities 最有活力的城市之一
5.be supposed to do sth. 应该干。
6.pack light clothes 穿薄衣服
7.take a trip 去旅行
8.provide sb with sth = provide sth for sb 为了某人提供某物
9.be away 离开，远离
10.the answer to the question 问题的答案
11.according to 根据。按照。 1
2.work as tour guides 做导游的工作
13.dream of 梦想，想到
14.less realistic dreams 不现实的梦想
15.be willing to do sth. 愿意干。
16.achieve one’s dreams 实现梦想
17.sail across the pacific 横渡太平洋
18.hold on to 保持，不要放弃（卖掉）
19.take it easy 从容 轻松 不紧张
20.Niagara Falls 尼亚加拉大瀑布
21.Eiffel Tower 艾菲尔铁塔
22.Notre Dame Cathedral 巴黎圣母院
23.this time of year 一年中的这个时候
24.in general 通常 ,大体上, 一般而言
三、句子
1.where would you like to go on vacation?
I’d like to trek through the jungle.
2.l like places where the weather is always warm.
3.I like to go somewhere relaxing 我喜欢去休闲的地方
4.For your next vacation, why not consider visiting Paris?
你下次度假为什么不考虑去巴黎？
5.Traveling around Paris by taxi can cost a lot of money.
乘坐出租车游览巴黎要花费很多钱
6.So unless you speak French yourself, it’s best to travel with someone who can translate things for you.
因此，除非你自己会讲法语，否则最好与一个能为你翻译的人一起去。
7. We’d like to be away for three weeks.
我们大约要去三个星期.
8.The person has a lot of money to spend on the vacation.
度假中这个人有很多钱可以花.
9.I hope you can provide me with some information about the kinds of vacations that your firm can offer
我希望能给我提供一些贵公司能经营的旅游项目的信息.
10.Could you please give me some suggestions for vacation spots?
你能给我一些有关度假地的建议吗？
11.You need to pack some warm clothes if you go there.
你如果去那里，需要带一些暖和的衣服。
12.I’d love to sail across the Pacific.
我想横渡太平洋。
Unit 8
一．知识点： 短语动词小结
常见短语动词结构有下面几种：
1.动词+副词 如：give up 放弃 turn off 关掉 stay up 熬夜
这种结构有时相当于及物动词，如果其宾语是代词，就必须放在动
词和副词之间，如果是名词，则既可插在动词和副词之间，也可放
在短语动词后。
2. 动词+介词 如：listen of 听 look at 看 belong to 属于
这种结构相当于及物动词，后面跟宾语。
3. 动词+副词+介词 如：come up with 提出，想出
run out of 用完，耗尽
4. 动词+名词(介词) 如：take part in参加 catch hold of 抓住
1.cheer (sb.) up 使(某人)高兴、振作 如：cheer me up 使我高兴
clean up 打扫 clean-up n. 打扫
2. homeless adj. 无家可归的 a homeless boy 一个无家可归的男孩home n. 家
4. sick adj. 生病的 作表语、定语
ill adj. 生病的 作表语 ，不能作定语
5. volunteer to do v. 志愿效劳、主动贡献
volunteer n. 志愿者
6. come up with 提出 想出 === think up 想出
catch up with 赶上 追上
7. put off doing 推迟做某事
put on 穿上 (指过程)
put up 张贴
8. write down 写下 记下
9. call up 打电话
make a telephone call 打电话
10. set up 成立 建立
The new hospital was set up in 2000. 这座医院是在2000年成立的。
11. each 每个 各自的 强调第一个人或事物的个别情况 常与of 连用
every 每个 每一个的 一切的 则有“全体”的意思不能与of 连用
12. put …to use 把… 投入使用，利用
They put the new machine to use. 他们把新机器投入使用
13. help sb. (to) do 帮助某人做某事 help him (to) study
help sb. with sth. 帮助某人做某事 help him with English
help do 帮助做某事 help study
14. plan to do 计划做某事
plan + 从句
I plan to go to Beijing. === I plan (that) I will go to Beijing.
我计划去北京。
15. spend … doing 花费…做… I spent a day visiting Beijing.
我花了一天的时间去参观北京。
spend… on sth. 花费…在… I spent 3 years on English.
16.not only … but (also) … 不但… 而且… 用来连接两个并列的成分
(1)引导以 not only …but (also)… 开头的句子往往引起部分倒装。
因此 ⑴Not only do I feel good but (also)…. 是倒装句。也是说得要
把前面的句子中的助动词或者是情态动词放在主语的前面。如：
①Not only can I do it but (also) I can do best.
我不仅能做到而且做得最好。
⑵Not only…but (also)… 接两主语时，谓语动词随后面的主语人称和数的变化 也就是就近原则 如：
①Not only Lily but (also) you like cat. 不仅莉莉而且你也喜欢猫。
②Not only you but (also) Lily likes cat. 不仅你而且莉莉喜欢猫。
常见的就近原则的结构有：
①Neither… nor…即不…也不… (两者都不)Neither you nor I like him. 我和你都不喜欢他。
②Either… or… 不是…就是… (两者中的一个)Either Lily or you are a student.
③Not only …but (also)…
④There be
17. join 参加 (指参加团体、组织) 如：join the Party 入党
take part in 参加 (指参加活动) 如：
take part in sports meeting 参加运动会
18. run out 与 run out of
①run out (become used up). 其主语往往为物。如时间，食物，金钱，油等，本
身就含有被动意义。
His money soon ran out. 他的钱很快就花光了。
My patience has completely run out. 我没有一点耐心了。
Our time is running out. 我们剩下的时间不多了。
②run out of 主语为人，表示主动含义。
He is always running out of money before pay day. 他总是在发工资的日子还没有到就把钱花完了。
两者在一定条件下可以互换
如：The petrol is running out. 汽油快用完了
= We are running out of petrol. 我们快把汽油用完了。
Our time is running out. 我们剩下的时间不多了。= We are running out of time
19. take after (在外貌、性格等方面)与(父母等)相像
be similar to 与..相像 take after 相像
look after 照顾 take care of 照顾
20. work out v. + adj.
①结局，结果为
The strategies that he came up with worked out fine. 他提出的这个策略效果很好。
②算出，制订出，消耗完（精力等）
He never seems to be worked out. 他好像永远不会疲乏似的。
He worked out a plan. 他制订了一个计划。
I have worked out our total expenses. 我已经算出了我们总的费用。
21. hang out 闲荡 闲逛
I like to hang out at mall with my friends. 我喜欢和我的朋友一起去购物中心闲荡。
22. be able to do 能 会
be unable to do 不能 不会
23. thank you for doing 谢谢做某事 如：
thank you for helping me 谢谢做帮助我
24. for sure 确实如此，毫无疑问
You don’t have money. That’s for sure. 你没有钱，这是毫无疑问的。
25. fill… with… 使…充满… 用…填充…
She filled the bowl with water. 她用水填满碗。
26. like prep. 像…
27. help sb. out 帮助…做事，解决难题(摆脱困境)
I can’t work out this math problem. Please help me out.
我不能算出这道数学问题，请你帮我解决。
28. train n. 火车 train v. 训练
train sb. to do. 训练某人做某事
She trains her dog to fetch things. 她训练她的狗去取东西。
29. at once == right away 立刻 马上 如：
Do it at once. 马上去做。
I’ll go there at once/ right away. 我马上去那里。
30. one day 有一天 (指将来/过去) some day 有一天(指将来) 如：
One day I went to Beijing. 有一天我去了北京。
Some day I’ll go to Beijing. 有一天我将去北京。
31. specially adv. 特意地 专门地 特别地 special adj. 特别的
32. donation n. 捐赠物 donate v. 捐赠 赠送
33. part of speech 词性 词类
34. disabled adj. 肢体有残疾的 disable v. 不能
35. hand out 分发 hand out bananas
give out 分发 give out sth to sb. 分….给某人
give up doing 放弃… give up smoking 放弃吸烟
give away 赠送 捐赠 give away sth. to …. give away money to kids
give sb. sth. 给某人某东西 give me money 给我钱
give sth. to sb. 给某人某东西 give money to me 给我线
36. volunteer ①可数名词 “志愿者” ②adj. 自愿的
vi. volunteer to do sth
They are the Chinese People’s Volunteers. 他们是中国人民志愿军。
I volunteer to help you. 我自愿帮助你。
37. no longer = not … any longer 指时间上不再延续。
no more = not … any more 指动作上不再延续。
二．短语
1.clean up 清扫
2.give out 分发，发放
3.cheer up=make…happier 使...高兴，使...振作
4.after school study program 课外学习班
5.come up with=think up 提出，想出
6.put off 推迟
7.write down 写下，记下
8.put up 张贴
9.hand out 分发，发放
10.call up 打电话
11.ser up=establish 建立
12.be home to sb 是某人的家园
13.volunteer one’s time to do sth 自愿花时间干...
14.put…to use… 把...投入使用
15.elementary school 小学
16.plan to do sth 计划干...打算干
17.coach a football team for kids 训练少年足球队
18.start a Chinese History club 开办一个中国史俱乐部
19.run out of 用完，耗尽
20.take after 在性格或长相方面与父母相象
21.fix up 修理
22.give away 捐赠
23.be similar to 与...相似
24.ask for 索要
25.a call-in center for parents 家长热线
26.hang out 闲荡
27.put up signs asking for singing jobs 张贴寻求唱歌工作的广告
28.run out of money for singing lessons 学唱歌的钱用完了
29.disabled people 残疾人
30.for sure 确实如此，毫无疑问
31.fill…with... 用...填充... be full of 装满了...
32.help...out 帮助...做事，解决难题（摆脱困境）
33.a specially trained dog 一只经过特殊训练的狗
34.train sb to do sth 训练某人干...
35.fetch my book 把我的书拿来
36.part of speech 词性
三．句子
1．We can’t put off making a plan. Clean-up Day is only two weeks from
now. 我们不能推迟制订计划，清洁日离现在只有两周了。
2．She puts this love to good use by working in the after-school care centre at her local elementary school. 她在当地的一所小学的课后辅导中心工作，使这个爱好得到较好的利用
3．Not only do I feel good about helping other people, but I get to spend time doing what I love to do. 帮助别人不但自己感到快乐，而且我开始花时间做自己喜欢做的事了。
4．The three students plan to set up a student volunteer project at heir school.
这三个学生计划在他们校开展一个学生志愿者项目。
5.He also put up some sign asking for old bikes.他还贴了一些需求旧自行车的告。
6.The strategies that he came up with worked out fine. 几米想出的这个办法很效。
7．He did a radio interview. 他接受了电台的采访。
8．We need to come up with a plan. 我们需要指定一个计划。
9．You could help clean up the city parks. 你可以帮助打扫城市公园。
10．He now has sixteen bikes to fix up and give away to children who
don’t have bikes. 他现在有16辆要修理的自行车，并准备把这些修好的自行车赠送给那些没有自行车的孩子。
Unit9
1. 被动语态
(1). 被动语态表示句子的主语是谓语动词所表示的动作承受者。
(2). 被动语态基本结构：be+及物动词的过去分词
(如果是不用物动词，其过去分词应带有相应的介词)
(3). 被动语态中的be 是助动词，有人称、数和时态的变化。
一般现在时被动语态为：am/is/are+过去分词
一般过去时被动语态为：was/were+ 过去分词
与情态动词连用的被动语态：情态动词+ be + 过去分词
(4). 被动语态中动作的发出者或执行者做介词by的宾语，放在句
末，by 表示“由，被”的意思
如何理解被动语态？
为取胜更清晰、更深刻地理解被动语态的含义，可以将主动语态和被动语态的句子结构进行比较。
主动语态： 主语+ 谓语动词 + 宾语 + 其他成分
被动语态： 主语+ be +过去分词 + by +宾语 +其他成分
如： Many people speak English.
被动语态 English is spoken by many people.
2. 本单元要掌握的句型 见课本P69 中的Grammar Focus
3. invent v. 发明 inventor n. 发明家 invention n. 发明 可数名词
4. be used for doing用来做…(是被动语态) 如：
Pens are used for writing. 笔是用来写的。
Pens aren’t used for eating. 笔不是用来吃的。
5. 给某人某样东西
give sth. to sb. 如：I gave a pen to him. 我给他一支笔。
give sb. sth. I gave him a pen. 我给他一支笔。
6. all day 整天
7. salty adj. 咸的 salt n. 盐
8. by mistake 错误地 如：
I took the umbrella by mistake. 我不小心拿错了雨伞。
9. make sb./sth. +形容词 使…怎么样 It made me happy. 它使我高兴
make sb./sth. +名词 让…做… It made me laugh. 它让我发笑
10. by accident 意外 偶然 I met her by accident at bus stop.
我在公共汽车站意外地见到了她。
11. not…until… 直到…才做… 如：
I didn’t go to bed until I finished my work. 我直到完成我的工作才去睡觉。
12. according to +名词 根据… 如： according to an legend
according to this article根据这篇文章 根据一个神话
13. over an open fire 野饮
14. leaf n. 叶子 复数形式 leaves
15. nearby adj. 附近的 如： the nearby river
16. fall into 落入 掉进 如：The leaf fell into the river. 叶子落入了河里。fall down 摔倒 如：She fell down from her bike.
她从她自行车摔倒了。
17. quite 非常 adv. 与冠词a连用时，冠词a必须放在它的后面
如： quite a beautiful girl 一个漂亮的女孩
very 非常 adv. 与冠词a连用时，冠词a必须放在它的前面
如： a very beautiful girl 一个漂亮女孩
注：当不与冠词a 连用时，两者可以互用 如：
I am very happy.=== I am quite happy. 我非常高兴。
18. in the way 这样
19. pleased adj. 表示外部因素引起人发自内心的欣慰和愉快
pleasant adj. 愉快 高兴 指天气、时间、旅行令人高兴愉快
please v. 使高兴 使同意
20. battery—operated adj. 电池控制的是名词+动词的运动分词构成的合成形容词
21. in the sixth century 在第6世纪
22. travel around 周游
23. more than === over 超过 如： more than 300 == over 300 超过300
24. including prep. 介词 包括 可以与名词和动名词连用
如: Six people, including a baby, were hurt. 6个人包括一个小孩受伤了。
25. have been played 被上演 是现在完成时的被动语态
现在完成时的被动语态的结构：have /has been +过去分词
26. be born 出生 He was born in Canada. 他在加拿大出生
27. safety n. 安全 safe adj. 安全的
28. knock into 撞上(某人)
29. divide sth. into … 将…划分成..
通常指将一个整体分成几个对应相对的部分 如：
Let’s divide ourselves into 4groups. 让我们把我们自己划成4组。
30. since then 自从那以后 常与完成时 态连用 如：
Since then, I have left Beijing. 自从那以后，我已经离开了北京。
Unit10
1. 过去完成时
(1) 构成：由助动词had + 过去分词 构成
否定式：had not + 过去分词 缩写形式：hadn’t
(2) 用法:过去完成时表示在过去某一时间或动作之前已经发生或完成了的动作。
(3) 它所表示的时间是“过去的过去”。
①表示过去某一时间可用by, before 等构成的短语来表示
②也可以用when, before, after 等引导的时间状语从句来表示
③还可以通过宾语从句或通过上下文暗示。
When I got there, you had already eaten you meal. 当我到达那里时，你已经开始了。
By the time he got here, the bus had left. 到他到达这里时，汽车已经离开了
2. by the time 直到…时候
指从过去某一点到从句所示的时间为止的一段时间 如：
By the time we got to his house, he had finished supper.
在我们到达他就已经吃完了晚饭。
3. 英语中表示“把某物遗忘在某处”常用 leave + 地点 ,而不是forget+地点 如：Unluckily, I left my book at home不幸的是，我把书忘在家里了。
4. close v. 关 adv. 接近地 靠近地 closed adj. 关的
5. come out 出来
6. on time 按时 准时 既不早也不迟 in time 及时 指在时限到来之前
7. luckily adv. 幸运地 lucky adj. 幸运的 luck n. 好运
8. give sb. a ride 让某搭便车 如：
He often gives me a ride to school. 他经常让我搭便车去学校。
9.only just 刚刚好、恰好
10. go off (闹钟)闹响 The alarm went off just now. 刚才警钟响了。
11. break down 坏掉
12. fool n. 傻子 呆子 v. 愚弄 欺骗 如： He is a fool. 他是一个呆子。
We can’t fool our teach. 我们不能欺骗我们的教师。(动词)
13. show up 出现 出席 She didn’t show up last night. 昨晚她没有出现
14. invite sb. to do sth. 邀请某人做某做事 如：
My friend invited me to watch TV. 我的朋友邀请我看电视。
15. set off 激起 出发 set up 建立
16. ①so … that 如此…以致于
引导结果状语从句，so后面接形容词、副词.
②so that作“为了”时，引导目的状语从句，从句常出现情态动词，
作结果状语从句时，从句中一般不用情态动词 。
如：She got up early so that she could catch the bus.
为了能赶上车，她起得很早。(目的状语从句)
She was so sad that she couldn’t say a word.
她悲伤得一句话也说不出来。(结果状语从句)
17. flee from 从…逃跑 避开 如：They fled from their home.
他们从他们的家里逃了出来。
18. thrill v . 使人非常激动，使人非常紧张
thrilled adj. 指某人感到激动或感到紧张
thrilling adj. 指某事物使人心情激动
19. get married 结婚
20. convince v. 使信服 convincing adj. 令人信服的
21. land v. 着落
22. be late for 迟到
23. a piece of 一片/块/张 如： a piece of paper/ bread 一张纸/ 一块面包
重点短语：
1.到…时候by the time +…(句子)…从过去某一点到从句所示时间为止的一段时间,即从句用过去时,主句用过去完成时。
2.(闹钟)闹响go off
3.跑掉;迅速离开run off
4.损坏break down (突然)中断break off
5.(在)愚人节(on) April Fool's Day
6.激起;引 起set off
7.一片,一块a piece of
8.按时on time 及时in time
Section A
1.从…离开去…leave (from)…for …
把某物遗忘在某地leave sth. +介宾短语(表地点的)
忘记某人/某事forget sb /sth.
忘记去作…forget to do …
忘记已作了…forget doing …
2.在洗沐浴get in the shower
3.开始作…start/begin to do …(前后不同的事)start/begin doing …(前后相同的事)
4.我上学从未迟到,但昨天我差点迟到.I 've never been late for school ,but yesterday I came very close.
5.等待(某人)作…wait (for sb )to do …
6.出来;开花come out 实现come ture 从旁而过come by 来自…come/be from…
7.我必须抓紧了.I had to really rush.
8.飞快冲了个 澡take/have a quick shower
9.给/让某人搭便车give/get sb. a ride =give /get a ride to sb.
10.我恰好赶上上课.I only just made it to my class.(此时,指"约定"之意)
SectionB
1.给某人穿衣服dress sb.
穿(…)衣服 be /get dressed (in +衣服)
化装;打扮dress up
2.熬夜stay /sit up (late)
3.给某人看某物show sb .sth.=show sth .to sb.
带某人参观…show sb.around sth.
卖弄…show off…
出席,露面show up
展览 be on show =be on display
4.化妆舞会a costume party
5.在地球着陆land on the earth
6.由演员奥森·威尔斯主 持的广播节目a radio program by actor Orsom Welles
7.遍及全国across the whole country =all over the whole country
8.从…逃跑;避开…flee from…=run away from…(flee过去式为fled )
9.将有…the re will be ….(一般将来时)
there would be …(过去将来时)
10.买尽可能多的意大利面条buy as much spaghetti as they could /possible
11.让某人嫁过某人ask sb .to marry sb.
结婚get married
和…结婚 get /be married with …=marry …
12.停止作…stop doing … 停下某事来作…stop to do …
13.在开学 第一天on the first day of school
14.(向某人)打招呼say hello (to sb.)
15.醒来wake up 叫…醒来wake sb. up
16. 有一个很愉快的结局have a very happy ending
17.失去了他的女朋友和他的观众lose both his girlfriend and his show
Unit11
1.宾语从句 宾语从句在复合句中作主句的宾语。
①由连接词+ 主语+ 谓语 构成
常由下面的一些连接词引导：
②由that 引导 表示陈述意义 that 可省略
He says (that) he is at home. 他说他在家里。
③由if , whether 引导 表示一般疑问意义(带有是否、已否、对否等)
I don’t know if / whether Wei Hua likes fish. 我不知道韦华是否喜欢鱼。
④由连接代词、连接副词(疑问词) 引导 表示特殊疑问意义
Do you know what he wants to buy? 你知道他想要买什么吗？
⑤从句时态要与主句一致
当主句是一般现在时，从句根据情况使用任何时态
He says (that ) he is at home. 他说他在家里。
I don’t know (that) she is singing now. 我不知道她正在唱歌。
She wants to know if I have finished my homework.
她想要知道我是否已经完成了我的作业。
Do you know when he will be back? 你知道他将会什么时候回来？
当主句是一般过去时，从句应使用过去某时态
(一般过去时,过去进行时，过去将来时，过去完成时)
He said (that) he was at home. 他说他在家里。
I didn’t know that she was singing now. 我不知道她正在唱歌。
She wanted to know if I had finished m homework.
她想要知道我是否已经完成了我的作业。
Did you know when he would be back? 你知道他将会什么时候回来？
2. get v. 得到、买、到达
3. make a telephone call 打电话
4. save money 省钱、存钱
5. ①问路常用的句子：
Do you know where …is ?
Can you tell me how can I get to …?
Could you tell me how to get to …？
②Can/Could/Will/Would you please tell me sth. 表示十分客气地询问事情
③Could you tell me how to get to the park?
请你告诉我怎么才能去邮局好吗？中的how to get to the park
是疑问词与动词不定式连用，用作宾语，但不是宾语从句，可是
相当于how I can get to the park（宾语从句）如：
I don’t know how to solve the problem. ==
I don’t know how I can solve the problem.我不知道如何解决这个问题
Can you tell me when to leave? ==
Can you tell me when I ill leave? 你能告诉我什么时候离开？
6. 日常交际用语：
take the elevator / escalator to the … floor.乘电梯/自动扶梯到…楼
turn left / right === take a left / right 向左/ 右转
go past 经过 go straight 向前直走
7. next to 旁边、紧接着 如：Lily is next to Ann. 莉莉就在安的旁边。
8. between … and… 在…和…之间
如: Lily is between Ann and Tom. 莉莉就在安和汤姆的之间。
9. decide to do 决定做… She decided to go to have lunch. 她决定去吃午餐。
decide v. decision n. make a decision 做个决定
10. Is that a good place to hang out? 那是不是一个闲荡的好地方？
中的to hang out修饰前面名词place，不定式作定语.
如：There are something to eat. 这有吃的东西。中的to eat修饰代词something，作定语.
11. kind of +adj./ adv. 译为“有点、一点”
如： She is kind of shy. 她有点害羞。
12. expensive 贵的 反义词 inexpensive 不贵的
13. crowded 拥挤的 反义词 uncrowded 不拥挤的
14. take a vacation == go on a vacation 去度假
15. dress up 打扮 dress up as 打扮成..
如：He wanted to dress up as Father Christmas.他想要打扮成圣诞老人。
16. on the beach 在海滩上 的介词用 on
17. politely adv. 有礼貌地 polite adj. 有礼貌的
18. depend on sth / doing / 从句 根据、依靠、依赖、决定于
Living things depend on the sunlight.生物对阳光有依赖性。
We can’t depend on his answer. 我们不能根据他的回答。
That depends on how you did it. 那决定于你怎样做这件事。
19. prefer动词 更喜欢 宁愿 常用的结构有：
prefer sth. 更喜欢某事 I prefer English. 我更喜欢英语。
prefer doing/ to do 宁愿做某事 I prefer sitting/ to sit.我宁愿坐着。
prefer sth to sth. 同…相比更喜欢… I prefer dogs to cats. 与猫相比我更喜欢狗。
prefer doing to doing 宁愿做某事而不愿做某事
I prefer walking to sitting. 我宁愿走路也不愿坐着
prefer to do rather than do 宁愿做某事而不愿做某事
I prefer to work rather than be free. 我宁愿工作而不愿闲着。
20. on the other hand 另一方面
21.把…借给某人lend sb. sth. ＝ lend sth.to sb. 如：
Lily lent me her book. == Lily lent her book to me .莉莉把她的书借给了我。
22. such as
23. I’m sorry to do sth. 对做某事我觉得很抱歉、伤心。
24. in a way 在某种程度说
25. in order to do 为了做… 表目的 如：
He got up early in order to catch the first bus.
他起早床，是为了赶上头班公共汽车。
26. 等级/同级比较：as…as ， not as/so…as
①as + 形容词/ 副词原级 + as
表示“和…一样的…”“…和…一样的…”
如： He works as hard as we. 他工作和我们同样努力。
②否定式：not as + 形容词/ 副词原级 + as
== not so + 形容词/ 副词原级 + as
He doesn’t work as / so hard as we. 他工作没有我们那样努力。
27. hand in 上交
Unit12
1. be supposed to do . 应该 如： We are supposed to stop smoking. 我们应该停止吸烟。
知识拓展 表示应该的词有：should, ought to ,be supposed to
2. shake hands 握手 shake 本意是“摇动、震动”
3. You should have asked what you were supposed to wear.
你本应该问清楚怎么样穿才得体。中的“should have asked”是
“情态动词＋现在完成时”表示过去本应该做某事，事实上没有做
如：She should have gone to Beijing. 她本应该去了北京。（没有去）
4. be relaxed about sth. 对某事随意、不严格 如：
They are relaxed about the time. 他们对时间很随意。
5. pretty adv. 相当,很＝very She is pretty friendly. 她相当友好。
adj. 美丽的 She is a pretty girl.她是一个美丽的女孩。
6. make plans to do == plan to do. 打算做某事 如：
She has made plans to go to Beijing.==She has planed to go to Beijing.
7. drop by 访问 看望 拜访 串门
We just dropped by our friends’ homes.我们刚刚去朋友家串门。
8. on time 按时
9. after all 毕竟 终究 如：You see I was right after all.你看，毕竟还是我对了。
10. invite sb. to do sth. 邀请某人做某事 如：
Lily invited me to have dinner.莉莉请我吃晚饭。
11. without 没有
12. around the world == all over the world 全世界
13. pick up 捡起 挑选 如：He picked up his hat. 他捡起他的帽子。
14. start doing == start to do 开始做某事 如
He started reading.== He started to read. 他开始读。
15. point at 指向
16. stick v. 剌 截 n. 棒，棍
chopstick 筷子 是由chop(砍)＋stick(棒)合成，通常用复数形式：chopsticks
17. go out of one’s way to do 特意，专门做某事 如：
He went out of his way to make me happy. 他特意使我高兴。
18. make mistakes 犯错误（复数）make a mistake 犯错误（一个）
19. be different from 与…不同 如：
Chinese food is different from theirs. 中国菜与他们的不同.
20. get/be used to sth. 习惯于…
get/be used to doing 习惯于…
be used to do 被用于做…
be used for doing 被用于做…
used to do 过去常常做… 如：
I wash clothes everyday. But I’m used to it.我每天都洗衣服，但我习惯了
I am used to washing clothes. 我习惯于洗衣服了。
The knives are used to cut things. 小刀被用来切东西。
The knives are used for cutting things. 小刀被用来切东西。
She used to watch TV after school. 她过去放学后常常看电视。
21. 我发现要记住每一样事是困难的。
I find it difficult to remember everything.
形式宾语 真正宾语
常见的形式宾语有：find / think + it/them +形容词 to do sth. 如：
I think it hard to study English.
22. cut up 切开 切碎 如：Let’s cut up the water melon. 让我们切开这个西瓜吧。
23. make a toast 敬酒
24. crowd v.挤满 其形容词和过去式及过去分词都是：crowded
25. set n. 一套 v. 设置
26. can’t stop doing 忍不住做某事 I can’t stop laughing. 我忍不住笑
27. make faces 做鬼脸
28. face to face 面对面
29. learn…by oneself 自学 如： I learn English by my self. 我自学英语。
Unit 13---Unit15 疑难点
一、疑点难点破解
1. You have to be careful.你得小心。 疑点：be careful“小心，当心”
如：Be careful while crossing the road.过马路要小心。
难点：be careful后常跟of短语。与它同义的有look out。
如：Aren’t you a bit too careful of your health？你对个人的健康难道不是有点过于小心了吗？
Look out！There’s danger ahead.当心！前面有危险。
2. At times an ad can lead you to buy something you don’t need at all.有时广告可能导致你买你根本不需要的东西。
疑点：at times= sometime，是副词性短语，表示事物发生的频率。
如：He is late for school at times.他有时上学迟到。
难点：1)对含有at times的短语进行提问时，用How soon.
如：How soon does he go to school late？At times.
2)句中lead意为“使得、导致”，常用于短语lead sb. to do sth.“导致某人做某事”
如：What leads you to think so？
3.Soft lighting makes people look good，but it make food look bad.柔和的光线使人的脸色看上去很好看，但使食物看起来很难看。
疑点：look good/bad意思为“外表的颜色看起来好看/难看”
如：The traffic accident made him look bad.
难点：look fine/ well指看起来身体健康
如：You look better today than yesterday.你今天看上去比昨天好多了。
3. It makes me want to join a clean-up campaign.这让我想加入一次清扫大运动。
疑点：注意join的用法：(1)join加入军队，政党，组织等，成为其中一员。
如：The next year he joined the union.第二年他加入了工会。
(2)join加入某人，并一起进行某项活动。
如：She joined her husband in his study.她与她的丈夫一块从事他的研究。
难点：与join意思相近的短语take part in也表示“参加……”，take an active part in积极参加。它侧重于参加某项活动或运动。
如：Do you take an active part in sports？你积极参加体育活动吗？
4. For instance，they can help you to compare two different products so that you can buy the one you really need.
例如，他们能够帮你比较两种不同的产品，以至于你能买到你真正需要的那个。
疑点：for instance相当于for example 意思为“例如”
如：He likes all kinds of sports， for instance he likes playing soccer very much.
难点：句中的compare意为“比较，对照”，可以构成短语compare...with...把……与……相比，compare...to...把……比作……
If we compare French schools with British schools，we will find many differences.
如果我们把法国的学校与英国的学校相比，会发现许多不同之处。
如：The poet compares the woman he loves to a rose.
这位诗人把他所钟情的女人比作玫瑰花。
5. If you think flowers are too feminine a gift for a man to receive，you can consider giving a plant instead.
如果你认为鲜花对一位男士来说太女性化而不好接受，你可以考虑送一种植物。
疑点：consider doing sth. 考虑做某事
如：I’m considering changing my job.我正在考虑换工作。
难点：consider还可以加that从句，表示“考虑到…”；还可以组成短语consider sb. +n/adj， 表示“把…看作/认为…”
如：If you consider that she’s only been studying English for six months，she speaks it well. 如果考虑到她学英语才六个月，那么她讲英语讲得的确不错了。
Do you consider her suitable for the job？你认为她做这工作合适吗？
二、重点讲解
1. Rainy days make me sad.雨天使人沮丧。 make的用法
(1)make+n.make food 做饭make a plane做飞机make the bed 铺床 make money 赚钱 make sb./sth.+adj.使某人(感到)，使……处于某种状态
(2)make的宾语之后可跟名词、形容词、分词来充当宾语的补足语
1)名词作make的宾语补足语
The party made her a good teacher.党把她培养成为一名好教师.
2)形容词作make的宾语补足语
如：Soccer makes me crazy.足球使我疯狂。
The soft music makes Tina sleepy.轻柔的音乐使Tina快睡着了。
Waiting for her made me angry.我很生气一直等着她。
可用到的形容词有：happy，pleased，surprised，angry，annoyed，sad，upset，unhappy，worried，anxious，excited，relaxed，stressed out，tense，calm，scared，comfortable，sick…
3)分词作make的宾语补足语
如： I made myself understood by all the students.
You must make yourself respected.
(3). make sb./sth.+do…使某人做某事(不能带不定式符号to)
如：Wars make the peace go away.战争使和平远离。
注意：当make用于被动语态时，必须带不定式符号to.
如：We were made to work all night.我们被迫日夜工作。
(4). make it习惯用语，及时赶到，到达目的地
如：I just made it to my class.(Unit 9)我恰好赶到班级。(arrived in time)
(5). make of /from./out of
make of 原材料制成成品后，原材料未经任何化学变化，仍保持原有性质.
如：The chair is made of wood.
make from当原材料制成成品后，经过了化学变化，失去了原有性质.
(6). make up of 常用于被动结构：be made up of…相当于consist of…(由……组成)
make up from 由…..所制造
如：A car is made up of many different parts.
She wore a necklace made up from gold coins.她戴着一串由金币制成的项链.
2.…but don’t really tell you anything about the quality of the product.但没有真正告诉你有关产品质量的任何问题。
tell sb. about sth.“告诉某人有关某事”，tell sb. sth.“告诉某人某事”。
如：The granny told us about a thief breaking into her house.
Tell me where you live.告诉我你住在哪儿。？
3. They also have to know how to make money.他们还必须知道如何赚钱。
(1)know how to do 其中的不定式带有疑问词。
know what to do 知道做什么。这一句式可以改为复合句，上句也可为：
They also have to know how they can make money.
又如：Please tell me when we should leave. =Please tell me when to leave.
请告诉我什么时候离开。
(2)make money/earn money挣钱
如：His father makes /earns a lot of money as a pilot.他父亲当飞机驾驶员挣钱很多。
4. However，some advertising can be confusing or misleading.
然而，一些广告会混淆或误导你。
(1)confuse v.使迷惑；confusing adj令人迷惑的；confusedadj.迷惑的，糊涂的
如：Waking up in strange surroundings confused her.她醒来时看到一片陌生的环境，这把她搞糊涂了。
The instructions are very confusing and I can’t understand them.这些指示莫名其妙，我没有办法理解
He gets confused easily.他很容易被弄糊涂。
(2)mislead v.使某人想错/做错，误导；misleading adj.令人受误导的
如：a misleading description/advertisement误导人的描述(广告)
5. Be sure to follow your host’s suggestions.务必要遵从主人的暗示或提议。
(1)be sure to别忘了，记住
如：Be sure to turn everything off before you go to bed.别忘了睡觉之前关上各样东西。
(2)be sure to do一定会……的，必定会发生的。
如：It’s sure to rain. 必定会下雨。
(3)be sure of 对……有把握。
如：He’s sure of living to ninety.他对活到90岁很有信心。
三、语法展示
宾语补足语
1.宾语补足语和宾语一起称为复合宾语，可作宾语补足语的有：名词，代词，形容词，副词，分词，不定式，介词短语，名词从句。
如：(1)We call him Jim.我们叫他吉姆。
(2)Whom do you think of me？ 你以为我是谁？
(3)Please keep the room clean.请保持室内清洁。
(4)He found her out.他发现她出去了。
(5)She found the book interesting.她认为这本书很有意思。
(6)You’d better have your shoes mended.你还是请人把鞋补一补吧。
(7)Make yourselves at home.不要受拘束。
(8)We made him what he is.是我们使他成为现在这样。
2.宾语补足语的注意事项
1)作宾语补足语的形容词应放在宾语后，若放在前则变成了定语。
如：(1)We found the man honest.我们发现此人很诚实。(宾补)
(2)We found the honest man.我们发现了这个诚实的人。(定语)
2)在动词elect，choose，make之后用作补语的名词，若是表示“身份，职位”则不带冠词。如：They elected Li Lei monitor last week.上周他们选李雷当班长。
3)有些动词后通常跟“to be+名词或形容词短语”作补语，但to be常省去。这些动词有：think，consider，believe，imagine，suppose，see，find，feel，etc.。
如：He thinks himself (to be) a clever man. 他认为自己很聪明。
4)复合宾语可变为宾语从句。
如：We think her a nice woman.→We think that she is a nice woman.我们认为她是个很好的人。
5)动词let，make，have及感官动词后用不带to的不定式作补语，若变为被动语态，应将to加上。
如：I saw tears come into her eyes.→Tears were seen to come into her eyes.我看到她眼里含着泪。
6)感官动词后跟不带to的不定式或现在分词作补语，其区别在于不定式强调事实经过或动作已完成，而现在分词则强调当时情景或动作正在进行。请比较。
如：I like to hear her sing.我喜欢听她唱歌。
I heard her singing last night.昨晚我听到她在唱歌。
一、疑点难点破解
1. Have you turned off your radio？你关掉收音机了吗？
疑点：turn off表示“切断、关上”之意，用于指切断电源、关上水管等。它的反义词是turn on。当关掉的东西是代词时，把代词放在中间。
如：His mother told him to turn off TV and do his homework.他母亲叫他关掉电视去做作业。
The tap is broken.If you want to save water，you must turn it off.
难点：与此相关的短语还有turn up“开大声”，turn down“关小点声”。用法同turn off/on.
如：It is too noisy. Please turn your radio down.
I can’t hear clearly. Would you please turn the tape up？
2.In the past twelve months they’ve had three major concerts and made a hit CD.在过去的12个月里他们举行了3次大型演唱会，出了一盘火暴的CD。
疑点：for/in the past/last twelve months/years/days/etc.常与现在完成时态连用。
如：(1)For the past few days he has been ill.几天来他一直生病。
(2)She has been ill for the last three days.这三个星期他在生病。
(3)In the past three years we have learned two thousand English words.
3年来我们学了2000个英语单词。
难点：用于肯定句时，和以上短语连用的动词必须是延续性动作。
如：He has had(而不是bought)the book for three years.他已经买这本书三年了。
You have kept(不用borrow) the book for two weeks.你已经借这本书两个星期了。
3. This program started in 1980 and so far has brought thousands of overseas Chinese students to China to look for their families’roots.这个项目是1980年开始的，到目前为止已经帮助了几千名海外中国学生来中国寻根。
疑点：so far意为“到目前为止”，相当于till now/up to now，可用于句首或句末，用作状语，表示范围、程度或距离，通常作为现在完成时的时间状语出现。
如：I have read many foreign stories so far.
难点：so far as 意为“就…而论”、“到…程度”，表示程度、距离等。
如：So far as I know，he has been to Beijing many times.据我所知，他已去过北京许多次了。
4. I agree with you. 我同意你的看法。
疑点：agree with sb./sb.’s idea/ sb.’s view同意某人，同意某人的观点、想法、主意。
如：My mother doesn’t agree with my father and me.我妈妈不同意我和爸爸的想法。
难点：agree还有许多的用法
(1)用于简短回答中“同意”或“赞成”。如：Chocolate is good for your health. Do you agree？
Yes，I agree./No，I don’t agree.
(2)agree to do sth同意去做某事。如：I agree to ask someone for help.我同意向别人求助。
(3)agree to sth赞成某个建议、安排等。如：He agreed to your suggestion.他赞成你的建议。
(4)agree on sth. 在……方面达成一致。如：We agree on a price for the car.我们就车价达成一致意见。
(5)agree that+从句。如：Tom’s mother agree that he went on with his study.
5.You have probably never heard of Amy Winterbourne.你大概从未听说过Amy Winterbourne.
疑点：hear of/about听说，接名词、代词或动名词。如：I have never heard of the story before.
难点：1)hear表示听说时，后面接宾语从句。
如：I heard that his father died yesterday.
2)hear from=get/receive a letter from意为“收到…的信”，“得到…的消息”from后面加表示人的名词或代词
如：How often do you hear from your father？你每隔多久收到你父亲的来信？
6. The walls are made from old glass bottles that are glued together.墙是由胶合在一起的旧玻璃瓶做成的。
疑点：be made from 意思是“由… 制成”，但制成品不能看出原材料。
如：Paper is made from wood.纸是由木头制成的。
难点：be made还可以构成其他词组，注意区分。
(1)be made of意为“由…原材料制成”，主语为制成品，而且能看出原材料，of后面接表示原材料的名词。如：This jacket is made of cotton.这件上衣是棉花做的。
(2)be made in表示某一产品在某地生产或制造，in后面跟表示地点的名词。
如：Trains are made in Zhuzhou.火车是株洲制造的。
(3)be made by意为“由(谁)制造的”，by后面接动作的执行者。如：The desk was made by his brother.这张桌子是他弟弟做的。
二、重点讲解
1. Have you packed yet？你打包了吗？
(1)这是一个现在完成时的句型，它是在两个时间上，一是过去，一是现在。它的动作发生在过去，但对现在有影响或结果，而这种影响和结果是说话人的兴趣所在，所以常常后面不用时间状语。Have/has+动词的过去分词，是它的基本结构。
如：Someone has broken the door.有人把门打破了。(结果，门仍破着)
(2)pack包装，把……装箱pack sth(up)into…整理行装
如：Pack clothes into a truck.把衣服装进衣箱内。
pack into塞进，挤进。如：The children packed into the cinemas on a wet day.在雨天，孩子们挤进电影院。
2. I have not cleaned out the refrigerator yet.我还没把冰箱清除干净。
clean sth out打扫某物之内部，扫除某物的尘土等。如：It is time for you to clean your bedroom.现在该你打扫你的卧室的时候了。
clean sth up清除罪犯和不道德分子，整顿(某物)。
如：The mayor has decided to clean up the city.市长已决定要整顿市政。
clean sth down清扫，擦干净。如：Clean down the walls.把墙上的尘土扫下。
3. I have not done any of these things yet Because my grandfather came to chat to me.那些事情我一样也还没做，因为我祖父来和我聊天。
(1)because连词，因为。如：I did it because they asked me to do it.我做这事是因为他们要我做。
(2)because所表达的原因是不知道的，如要表达明显的理由，或被认为是知道的，就用as，for，或so。如：As it is raining，you had better take a taxi.=It is raining，so you had better take a taxi.既然下雨，你最好坐出租车来。
(3)because of 后面加名词或名词短语。
如：Because of his bad legs，he could not walk so fast as the others.因为他的腿有毛病，他不能和别人一样走得快。
4.Be sure not to miss them if they come to a city near you-if you can get tickets.如果他们到了一个离你近的城市，务必不要错过，如果你能得到票的话。
be sure to do务必，一定要。如：Be sure to tell me when you arrive home.到家后务必要告诉我一声。
★注意动词不定式to do的否定形式，要直接在to do前加not。如：Be sure not to wake up the sleeping boy.一定不要吵醒在睡觉的孩子。
5. I feel like I have done something that wasn’t important to me before.我想我做了些原先对我并不重要的一些事情。
feel like+ doing sth.想要，欲要。如：I don’t feel like eating a big meal now.我现在不想吃大餐。
6. They provide homes for many endangered animals，and help to educate the public about caring for them.我们为濒危动物们提供住所，并教育公众照顾他们。
provide sth for sb /provide sb with sth把某物提供给某人。如：These letters should provide us with all the information we need.这些信应该为我们提供所需的全部信息。
三、语法展示
(一)特殊副词的用法
现在完成时态我们在前面的一、二个单元中已讲述过，所以本单元只讲现在完成时态与几个副词的关系。
1. ever， never
ever“曾经”，表示从过去到目前为止的时间，用于现在完成时态的疑问和含有最高级的从句中，否定句中常用never代替ever，在反意疑问句中，附加问句用肯定。
如：(1)Have you ever been to Hefei？你曾去过合肥吗？
(2)This is the most interesting film that I have ever seen.这是我曾看过的电影中最有趣的一部。
(3)He has never been to the Great Wall，has he？他从未去过长城，是吗？
2. still，just
still“仍然，还”，强调过去开始的情况或动作仍在继续，指时间，强调延续；just“刚刚，刚才”，多与现在完成时连用。注意要与just now区别开，just now指过去的时间，常与过去时连用。
如：(1)Has your sister still lived here？你妹妹仍然住在这儿吗？
(2)I have just finished lunch.我刚吃过中饭。
(3)I saw her mother just now.我刚才看见了她母亲。
3. before，ago
两者都可作副词用，before表示过去时间的以前，可独立使用，泛指“以前”，可用于现在完成时态或一般过去时态。ago不能独立使用，要置于时间段的词组之后，只能用于过去时态，表示从现在算起以前的时间。但可以用在情态动词加完成时态结构中，表示现在对过去发生的事情的推测。此外与since连用，构成since…ago用于现在完成时态。
如：(1)She has seen the film before. 她以前看过这部电影。
(2)Mary saw Jim a week ago.玛丽一周前见过吉姆。
(3)A lot of new things have happened since ten years ago.自十年前以来发生了很多新鲜事。
4. since，for
since：“自从”，表示的是一个时间点，可用作介词，也可作连词。用作介词时，后接指时间点的名词或短语；用作连词时，后跟一个时间状语从句，但其前的谓语动词或主句的谓语动词须用现在完成时。for构成的短语在现在完成时里，表示时间的长度，后须跟“一段时间”，不可跟“时间点”。
如：(1)He has worked at that factory since he came to the city.他到这城市以来一直在这家工厂工作。
(2)I have studied English for three years. 我学习英语已有三年了。
(二)have been to 与have gone to 的区别
(1)have been to表示“已经去过某地”，现在已经不在所去的地方了
如：He has been to America twice.他已经去过美国两次了。
(2)have gone to表示“去了某地”，并未回来，最起码不在当地。
He is not here. He has gone to America.他不在这里，他去美国了。
Unit 13---Unit15单元重难点句子讲解
1. I’d rather go to the Blue Lagoon Restaurant... 我宁愿去Blue Lagoon餐厅，……
would rather意为“宁愿……”，表示句子主语的愿望、选择，后接省去to的不定式。
He’d rather join you in the English Group. 他宁愿加入到你的英语小组中来。
Which would you rather have, bread or rice? 面包和米饭，你更喜欢哪一个？
如果表示“宁愿（可）……也不愿……”则用句型would rather...than...。在would rather和than后面所连接的两个对比部分一般要一致。
The brave soldier would rather die than give in.那个勇敢的士兵宁死不屈。
He’d rather work than play. 他宁愿工作也不愿玩。
They preferred to die of hunger rather than take his bread.
他们宁愿饿死也不愿接受他的面包。
2. Loud music makes me happy. (P103)嘈杂的音乐使我很开心。
Loud music always makes me want to dance. (P103)嘈杂的音乐总是使我想去跳舞。
这两句是动词make的使役用法，make me后分别接了形容词和不定式短语。make的这种用法常见于以下结构：
◎ make+名词（代词）+省略to的动词不定式
My parents often make me do some other homework. 我父母常让我做些其他的作业。
特别提示
这一结构中的不定式短语在主动结构中是宾语补足语，必须省去to，变为被动结构时，不定式短语作主语补足语，这时必须带to。
She was made to work for the night shift. 她不得不上夜班。
◎make+名词/代词+-ed分词短语
What made them so frightened?什么使他们这样害怕？
Can you make yourself understood in English?你能用英语把意思表达清楚吗？
◎make+名词/代词+介词短语或名词短语
She made him her assistant. 她委派他做自己的助手。
Sit down and make yourselves at home, everyone.大家请坐，不要拘束。
◎make+名词（代词）+形容词或形容词短语。
The good news made us happy. 这条好消息使我们很高兴。
3. ... small restaurants can serve many people every day. (P104)……小饭店每天就可以多接待些顾客。
句中的serve 有“服侍，侍候，招待”等意思，常用于以下结构中：
◎ serve+宾语
They were busy serving the day’s last buyers.他们正忙着接待这天的最后一批顾客。
Nobody can serve two masters. 一人不能侍奉二主。
◎ serve sb sth, 或serve sth to sb
Mrs Turner served us a very good dinner.
=Mrs Turner served a very good dinner to us.
特纳太太招待我们吃了一顿丰盛的晚餐。
◎ serve sb with sth
We served them with beer and wine. 我们用啤酒和红酒招待他们。
4. However, some advertising can be confusing or misleading. (P106)可是，一些广告可能会混淆黑白或误导消费。
confusing与misleading是两个现在分词，相当于形容词，意思分别是“感到混消的”和“误导的”
，在句中作表语，主语通常是表示物的名词或代词，如本句中的用法；也可以用作定语，既可修饰表示人的名词或代词，也可以修饰表示物的名词或代词。
They can be some confusing or misleading advertisements.
它们可能是一些混淆黑白或误导消费的广告。
What he said made us confusing.他说的话令我们感到困惑。
5. At times an ad can lead you to buy something you don’t need at all.(P106) 有时，一则广告会诱导你去买你根本就不需要的东西。
at times意为“有时，不时”，与sometimes同义。两者在句中的位置较灵活，可位于句首，句中或句末。
At times I make mistakes when I speak English. 我说英语时有时会出错。
They went to town at times during the cold winter.在寒冷的冬天，他们有时候进城去。
Sometimes they walk to school. 有时候，他们步行上学。
He sometimes plays football with his friends. 他有时和朋友一起踢足球。
6. To start with, it was raining, and rainy days make me sad. (P107)起初，天在下雨，雨天使我心情很不好。
◎ start with作“首先”解时，只用于动词不定式，在句中常常以插入语的形式出现。
To start with, the computer room must be kept very clean.
首先，计算机工作室必须保持清洁。
Our group had five members, to start with.刚开始，我们小组只有五个人。
◎ start with可表示“从……开始”；“先从某事做起”，与begin...with是同义词组。反义词组是end with“以……结束”。
He started/began with the aim of injuring others only to end up by ruining himself.他本想损害别人，结果只害了自己。
The meeting ended with a speech given by the chairman.会议以主席的讲话结束。
He wanted to start/begin with the smallest country and end with the largest one.
他打算先去最小的国家，最后去最大的国家。
◎ start单独使用时，意为“开始”，可用作及物动词或不及物动词。用作及物动词时，其后跟名词、代词，也可跟动词不定式或动名词形式。begin是start的同义词，两者在用法上没有很大差别，只是start侧重动作的突然开始。
As soon as we got there, it started raining.我们一到那儿就下雨了。
When did we start/begin this lesson?我们是什么时候开始讲这一课的？
7. ...some people would rather just give money.(P108)……有些宁愿只给钱。
句中的would rather是would rather...than...的省略形式，意为“宁愿……而不……”，表示主观愿望。使用这一结构，要注意两个比较的部分对等。
You would also rather stay at home and read a good book than go to a party.
你宁愿待在家里看一本好书也不愿去参加舞会。
I would rather have the small one than the big one.我宁愿要小的，不要大的。
特别提示：
比较的部分如果是动词，than后应是动词原形。
8. I prefer to receive a gift... (P108)我宁愿接受一件……礼物。
prefer表示选择时，可用两种句型。
（1）prefer+名词或动名词+to+名词或动名词。
They prefer red to blue.与蓝色相比，他们更喜欢红色。
I preferred doing something to doing nothing.我喜欢做点什么，而不喜欢闲着。
（2）prefer+不定式或名词+rather than+不带to的动词不定式。
He preferred to walk there rather than go by bus.
他喜欢走着去那儿，不喜欢乘公共汽车。
She prefers to read rather than sit idle.她喜欢读书而不愿闲坐着。
Unit 14
1. Sorry I couldn’t get back to you sooner. (P112)很抱歉我没能尽快给你回复。
这是在E-mail message回复中的常用语,句中“get back to sb”的意思是“以后再答复”。
I can’t give you a definite answer now but I’ll get back to you about it soon.
我现在不能给你一个明确的回答，但我很快会给你答复的。
2. In the past twelve months, they’ve had three major concerts and made a hit CD. 在过去的十二个月里，他们举办了三场较大的音乐会，出版了一张很受欢迎的CD唱片。
（1）“in the past+时间段”常用于完成时的句子中，表示“在过去的……时间里”，past是形容词，可以用last来替换，而past/last的后面通常要使用“数字+名词”的结构。
In the past/last two years, she has studied English very hard.
在过去的两年里，她一直在努力地学英语。
（2）短语make a hit表示“大获成功”、“（演出等）大受欢迎；受到赞扬”等，hit是名词，表示成功而风行一时的事物，如电影，歌曲，演出等。
Zhou Jielun has just made a hit CD. 周杰伦刚出版了一盘轰动一时的CD。
His song was a great hit. 他的歌曲轰动一时。
He made a great hit in teaching. 他曾在教学上获得了巨大的成功。
3. And then they’re going to go on a world tour in which they will perform in ten different cities. (P114)然后，他们将去世界各地旅行并在十个城市巡回演出。
...in which they will perform in ten different cities是定语从句，先行词是tour,在关系代词which前介词in通常的位置是在动词perform的后面。本句为了避免与in two different cities短语中的in重复，将perform后的第一个in前置。句中perform 主要指扮演角色，演奏某种乐器，演出某一节目，侧重能力，技巧，效果，可用 作及物动词和不及物动词。
The magician performed wonderful tricks. 魔术师表演了精彩的魔术。
He performs perfectly on the piano. 他的钢琴演奏太棒了。
4. Be sure not to miss them if they come to a city near you — if you can get tickets, that is. (P114)如果他们来到你附近的城市，千万不要错过——当然，如果你能弄到票的话。
（1）句中的that is表示“确切地；换句话说；也就是”，用来表达一个准确的说法，即对前面的内容加以准确地说明。
She’s a housewife — when she’s not teaching English, that is.
她是个家庭主妇——是指她不教英语的时候。
（2）句中miss是“错过”，后接名词、代词或v-ing形式，不可接不定式。
They missed the train by two minutes.他们差两分钟没赶上火车。
I came late and missed seeing the beginning of the movie.
我来晚了，没有看见电影的开始部分。
miss还可表示“丢失”、“失去”，与lose同义。
5. ...but we really hope to have a number one hit some day. (P114)……但是我们真的希望有朝一日我们制作出能卖得最好的一首歌。
some day意为“将来某一日”，等于someday,与one day是近义词。some day/someday只表示将来，不表示过去。而one day用在过去时的句子里是“有一天”的意思，用在将来时的句子里是“将有一天”，与some day/someday可互换。
He will be a scientist some day.总有一天他会成为科学家。
I hope to see you one day/someday.我希望有一天会看到你。
One day last summer they made a trip to the country.
去年夏天某日他们到乡间旅行。
试译：你一定要有一天来看我。
You must come one day to see me.
You must come some day to see me.
You must come to see me someday.
他有一天来看了我。
误：He came some day to see me.
正：He came one day to see me.
6. ...as a part of the “In Search of Roots” summer camp program. (P116)……作为“寻根”夏令营活动的一部分。
in search for是固定短语,for 后面的名词同样必须是“寻找的目标”，不是“搜寻的对象”。search前常出现a 或one’s等词对search加以限定或修饰，这个短语也常作目的状语。
The soldiers were sent in a search for the missing aircraft.
士兵们被派去搜寻失踪的飞机。
So far, they have been unlucky in their search for gold and have no money at all.
到现在为止，他们寻找金子的运气一直不好，而且他们身上也没钱了。
知识拓展
search的基本用法
（1）search的动词用法。
◎ search不与介词或副词搭配时是及物动词，表示“搜查”的意思，其后通常接处所或人物名词，表示搜查的对象。
He even searched my home without any reason.
他甚至毫无理由地搜查了我的家。
I’ve searched my memory, but can’t remember that man’s name.
我苦思良久，仍然记不起那人的名字。
They searched every part of the building. 他们对全楼进行了搜查。
◎ search用不及物动词，后面接介词for 和after，构成及物性动词短语，两者是“搜寻，寻找”的意思，表示花费极大的气力去搜寻某个特定的目标，常含有对立或不对立的意味，两者可以通用，只不过search for 更常见些。
For a whole day they searched for/after the lost child.
他们找了一天这个丢失的孩子。
7. ...and so far has brought thousands of overseas Chinese students... (P116) ……到目前为止，它带来了成千上万的海外华裔学生……
so far 意思是“到目前为止”，常用于完成时，表示动作从过去开始一直延续到现在，强调到目前为止的情况,可位于句首，也可位于句末。
So far, no man has traveled farther than the moon.
到现在为止，还没有人到过比月球更远的地方。
How many travelers have been to Disneyland so far?
到现在为止有多少旅客到过迪斯尼乐园？
So far we haven’t got any news from them.
到目前为止，我们还没有得到他们的任何消息。
8. Most, like Robert, can hardly speak any Chinese, and have never been to China before. (P116) 像罗伯特一样，大多数人几乎都不会说中文，而且以前从来没有到过中国。
（1）hardly是一个否定副词，表示“几乎不，简直不”，相当于almost not，含有否定的意义，故在句中不能另加否定词。切莫将hardly误认为是由hard+ly构成的副词。此外，hardly 位于句首时，要用倒装语序。
I hardly know what to say. 我简直不知道说什么好。
Hardly can I move this heavy desk. 我简直移不动这张重桌子。
— Can you catch what I said?你能听懂我说的话吗？
— Sorry, I can hardly understand it.对不起，我几乎听不懂。
（2）have been后面接to表示某人“去过某地，现在已经回来了”，可用于各种人称。
Have you ever been to Shanghai? 你曾经去过上海吗？
He has been to America twice. 他到美国去过两次。
have gone to与have been in的用法
have gone 表示某人“去某地了”，不论是在途中还是到了目的地，重点是强调这个人已经不在说话人所在的地方了，常用于第三人称；have been in，则表示一直“呆在某个地方”，常与表示一段时间状语连用。
Henry has gone to London. 亨利到伦敦去了。
They have been in Beijing for two weeks.
他们在北京已经有两个星期了。
10. Thanks to In Search of Roots... (P116)多亏“寻根”……
【知识归纳】thanks, thanks to与thanks for的用法
◎ thanks是名词thank的复数形式，意为“感谢”。表示“感谢”之意，可以说：
Thanks a lot.
Many thanks.
A thousand thanks.
◎ thanks to是介词词组，后面可以接名词或代词，意为“多亏”；“由于”，在句中作原因状语。
Thanks to the old man, we found the lost child at last.
多亏那个老人，我们最后找到了失踪的孩子。
◎ thanks for用于对别人已做的事表示感谢，后接名词，代词，或v-ing形式。
Thanks for sending me such a nice present.谢谢你寄来这么好的礼品。
A thousand thanks for your help.非常感谢你的帮助。
Unit 15
1. In 1972, it was discovered that they are endangered.(P119) 1972年，人们发现它们已经濒于灭绝。
was discovered是一般过去时的被动语态，discover“发现”，近义词为find和invent。
discover, invent与find
◎discover指发现过去所不知道的东西，新奇或意外的东西。
Coal was first discovered and used in China.
中国首先发现并使用了煤。
Columbus discovered America on the 12th of October, 1492.
1492年10月12日，哥伦布发现了美洲。
◎invent意为“发明”，即创造出以前从未存在过的东西。
Edison invented the electric lamp.爱迪生发明了电灯。
Radio had just been invented then.那时无线电刚刚发明出来。
◎find意为“找到”，侧重于找到过去丢失的人或物，但有时也表示凭经验或偶然发现了一种东西。
Today, corn is found all over the world.今天，全世界都有了玉米。
She found him a very good pupil.她发现他是个非常好的学生。
◎有时find和discover可以互相替代，意思相同。
His notebook was found/discovered in the desk.
他的笔记本是在课桌里找到的。
2. Some of the swamps have become polluted. (P119)一些沼泽地受到了污染。
have become polluted 中的become是连系动词，polluted是过去分词。这种“系动词+过去分词”结构，意思上也接近被动语态。
The slodier got wounded(接近were wounded)in the battle.
这几名战士在这场战斗中受了伤。
A few minutes later, the ground became/was covered with snow.
几分钟后地上尽是雪。
3. They provide homes for many endangered animals... (P120)他们为许多濒临灭绝的动物提供家园……
provide是及物动词，意为“提供”，“供给”。表示“提供……人……物件”是provide...with...；“提供……给……人”是provide...for...。
The school provides us with all the materials we need.
学校提供我们所需要的一切资料。
We are provided with everything we need for work.
我们被提供了工作所需要的一切。
The school provides all the books we need for us.
学校为我们提供我们需要的书籍。
◎ provide for是“供养”的意思。
He has a large family to provide for. 他要养活一个大家庭。
4. ...and help to educate the public about caring for them. (P120)……并且帮助教育公众关爱它们。
care for表示“喜欢”，“关心”之意，后接名词或v-ing形式作宾语，take care of也有这个意思。
He cared nothing for skating. 他对滑冰没有兴趣。
In our class, we care for each other. 在我们班上，我们相互关心。
Maria takes good care of everybody. 玛丽亚很关心大家。
care for还可以表示“照顾”，“照料”，相当于take care of或look after。
At night he fed and cared for the cattle. 夜里他照料牲口，给牲口喂食。
You must care for yourselves.
=You must look after yourselves.
你们要照顾好自己。
The children are well cared for in the nurseries.
=The children are taken good care of in the nurseries.
孩子们在托儿所受到很好的照顾。
5. turn off the shower while you are washing your hair. (P121)洗头的时候关掉淋浴。
（1）turn off表示“关掉”，用在关掉收音机，煤气，自来水等场合。与其相关的几个短语是turn on“打开”，turn down“关小”，turn up“开大”。
（2）句中while与when是同义词，都可以用从属连词，引导状语从句表示时间，意思都是“当（在）……的时候”，但二者之间是有区别的。
while与when的用法
◎ when的含义是at or during the time that,既可用于指一点时间（从句的谓语动词需用终止性动词），也可用于指一段时间（从句的谓语动词用延续性动词），从句与主句里面的谓语动词所表示的动作或状态能同时发生，或一先一后发生。
He wants to help people when they are ill.
他想在人们生病的时候帮助他们。
When he got to Shanghai, the ship had already set off.
他到达上海时，轮船已经开走了。
◎ while的含义是during the time that,只能用于指一段时间（从句的谓语动词必须是延续性的），从句与主句里面的谓语动词所表示的动作只能同时发生，不能一先一后发生。
While I was reading, my mother was washing clothes.
我读书时，妈妈在洗衣服。
◎这两个词还可以用作并列连词。when表示“在那时”或“这时突然”，相当于and just at that time的意思，用来连接两个并列分句，有时when分句之前有逗号把前后两个分句分开。
I stayed till sunset, when it began to rain.
我一直呆到太阳下山，这时天开始下雨了。
◎ while意为“而”，“却”，表示对照关系。
Some like collecting stamps, while others like planting flowers.
有些人喜欢集邮，而有些人却喜欢种花。
6. You have probably never heard of Amy Winterbourne. (P122) 你可能从来没有听说过Amy Winterbourne。
【知识归纳】hear, hear from, hear of与hear that clause的用法：
（1）hear单独使用表示“听见”，“听到”，常用的结构有：
◎ hear sb/sth“听到某人或某物的声音”。
I can’t hear you at all. 我根本就听不到你的声音。
Haven’t you heard anything? 难道你没有听到什么声音？
◎ hear sb do sth“听到某人做某事”。
I often hear Li Ping read English in the morning.
我经常在早晨听到李平读英语。
◎ hear sb doing sth“听到某人正在做某事”。
I heard him singing in the next room.我听见他正在隔壁房间里唱歌。
特别提示
hear sb do sth指听到整个行动或整个事件；而hear sb doing sth是指听到了行动的一部分，有正在发生的意思。试比较：
I heard the boy go down the stairs.我听到这个男孩走下楼去。
I heard the boy going down the stairs我听到这个男孩下楼的声音。
（2）hear from意为“收到……的信”；“得到……消息”。
How often do you hear from your father? 你每隔多久收到你父亲的信？
Have you still not heard from him? 你还没有收到他的信吗？
I haven’t heard from him since he telephoned.
自从他打电话以来，我一直没有他的消息。
特别提示
hear from的宾语是表示人的名词或代词，而不是表示信件的名词。
纠错：
我们好几个星期未收到他的信了。
误：We haven’t heard from his letter for weeks.
正：We haven’t heard from him for weeks.
正：We haven’t got a letter from him for weeks.
（3）hear of意为“听说”，后面接名词，代词或动名词。
I’ve never heard of that before.我以前从未听说过那件事。
She disappeared and was never heard of again.
她不知去向了，再未听到她的消息。
（4）hear接从句，是“听说”的意思。
One day, the Smiths heard that there was a good doctor in a town not far away.
一天，史密斯一家听说不远的镇里有一位好医生。
I hear that one of the pandas has a baby.
我听说其中一只熊猫生了个熊猫宝宝。
7. She is a most unusual woman. (P122)她是一个十分不寻常的女性。
【知识归纳】a most, the most与most的用法
（1）a most的用法。在“a most+形容词+名词”结构中，most是副词，意为“很，非常”，相当于very,用来修饰它后面的形容词，本句就是这一用法。
Guilin is a most beautiful city.桂林是座非常美丽的城市。
This is a most interesting story.这是一个非常有趣的故事。
（2）the most 的用法
◎在“the most+形容词+名词”结构中,most 是副词，表示程度，意为“最”，与其后的形容词一起构成形容词的最高级。
He is one of the most famous writers in China. 他是中国最著名的作家之一。
This is the most difficult (one) of the three. 这是这三者中最难的。
◎在“动词+the most”结构中，most 也是副词，其作用和意思是“最”其位置通常在动词后。
They like English the most. 他们最喜欢英语。
（3）most 通常有三种用法
◎在“most+副词或形容词”结构中，most 是副词，意为“很，非常，十分”。
I shall most certainly go there. 我十分肯定会到那里去。
◎在“most+名词”结构中，most 是形容词，意为“大部分的，大多数”或“最多的”。
Most students like English. 大多数学生喜欢英语。
Who has (the) most books among you?你们中谁的书最多？
8. The walls are made from old glass bottles that are glued together. (P122) 墙是由旧玻璃瓶粘在一起建成的。
be made from/of意为“由……（原料）制成”，后面一般接物质名词。接from则表示某物品制成后，已看不出原材料是什么，原材料在制作过程中已起了化学变化；接of表示某物品制成后，仍可看得出原材料，其原料在制作过程中仅起了物理变化。
Nylon is made from air, coal and water.尼龙是由空气，煤和水加工制成的。
Wine is made from grapes. 葡萄酒是由葡萄制成的。
The desk is made of wood. 这桌子是由木头做的。
The shoes are made of cloth.这鞋子是用布做的。
知识拓展
◎ be made up of表示某物或某组织由一种种成分或一个个成员组成。
The world is made up of matter.世界是由物质构成的。
A TV set is made up of hundreds of different parts.
电视机是由数百个不同的零件组装成的。
◎ be made into意为“把……做成……”，主语在意义上为原材料，介词宾语在意义上为制成品。
Bamboo is also made into paper.竹子也可以用来造纸。
◎be made in意思是“在……（地点）制造”，介词in后接产地。
This kind of computer is made in the USA．这种电脑是美国制造的。
This printing machine was made in Beijing.这台印刷机是北京生产的。
◎be made by意思是“由……制造”，介词by后跟动作的执行者。
This model ship is made by Uncle Wang. 这个轮船模型是由王叔叔制作的。
9. Amy recently won an award from the Help Save Our Planet Society. (P122)艾米最近获得了“救助地球”协会的奖励。
（1）recently 表示“最近”，既可以用于表示一段时间，也可以表示一点时间，多用于完成时态。
Have you hear from Michael recently?你最近接到迈克尔的来信吗？
Recently he has made quite a few mistakes. 最近他出了不少错。
（2）won a award中award是 “奖”的意思，相关词语有prize，reward和scholarship，这几个词都与“奖”有关。
（3）句中的win表示“赢”奖的意思。
At the national amateur song-writing contest, he won a first-class award.
在全国业余作曲比赛中，他获得了一等奖。
win可表示“赢得比赛，战斗”等，宾语一般是比赛，竞赛，战争等名词，与beat近义。
知识拓展
win与beat的用法
两者在表示“赢”，“胜”的意思时，后面所接的宾语有所不同。“赢比赛或一场战斗”用win；“赢某人”是beat。
We won the match months ago. 几个月前，我们赢得那场比赛。
Which side won the battle? 这一战谁打胜了？
But still we weren’t sure we could beat them.
但是我们还不能肯定我们能打赢他们。
Dick beat John and won the game. 狄克打败了约翰，赢得了比赛。
微信/支付宝扫码支付下载